FCC 47cfr80.pdf.15 as of October 1, 2007

Goto Section: 47cfr80.pdf.13 | 47cfr80.pdf.17 | Table of Contents

FCC 47cfr80.pdf.15
Revised as of October 1, 2007
Goto Year:2006 | 2008

Skip to content. Skip to side navigation. Quick Navigation:
* Resources by Topic
* Business & Economy
* Education
* Environment
* Food & Drugs
* Grants & Awards
* Health & Safety
* Military & Security
* Science & Technology
* Social Programs
* Transportation

Skip to content. Skip to side navigation.
GPO Access Home Page.

Quick Navigation:

[Resources by Topic..] Jump to selected topic.

Site Search:
advanced

____________________ Submit Search

Navigation Bar

National Archives and Records Administration logo.

Database Features.

•

Browse

•

Simple Search

•

Advanced Search

* Boolean
* Proximity
• Search History
• Search Tips

•

Corrections

•

Latest Updates
• User Info
• FAQs

•

Agency List

•

e-CFR Main Page

Related Resources

•

Code of Federal Regulations

•

Federal Register

•

List of CFR
Sections Affected

•

Regulations.gov

•

Unified Agenda

•

All NARA Publications
About Government.
Ben's Guide Logo.
Ben's Guide
to U.S.
Government

Get Adobe Reader

Home Page > Executive Branch > Code of Federal Regulations > Electronic Code
of Federal Regulations

blue pill
e-CFR Data is current as of October 1, 2007

Title 47: Telecommunication

Browse Previous | Browse Next

PART 15—RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES
___________________________________

Section Contents

Subpart A—General

§ 15.1 Scope of this part.
§ 15.3 Definitions.
§ 15.5 General conditions of operation.
§ 15.7 [Reserved]
§ 15.9 Prohibition against eavesdropping.
§ 15.11 Cross reference.
§ 15.13 Incidental radiators.
§ 15.15 General technical requirements.
§ 15.17 Susceptibility to interference.
§ 15.19 Labelling requirements.
§ 15.21 Information to user.
§ 15.23 Home-built devices.
§ 15.25 Kits.
§ 15.27 Special accessories.
§ 15.29 Inspection by the Commission.
§ 15.31 Measurement standards.
§ 15.32 Test procedures for CPU boards and computer power supplies.
§ 15.33 Frequency range of radiated measurements.
§ 15.35 Measurement detector functions and bandwidths.
§ 15.37 Transition provisions for compliance with the rules.
§ 15.38 Incorporation by reference.

Subpart B—Unintentional Radiators

§ 15.101 Equipment authorization of unintentional radiators.
§ 15.102 CPU boards and power supplies used in personal computers.
§ 15.103 Exempted devices.
§ 15.105 Information to the user.
§ 15.107 Conducted limits.
§ 15.109 Radiated emission limits.
§ 15.111 Antenna power conduction limits for receivers.
§ 15.113 Power line carrier systems.
§ 15.115 TV interface devices, including cable system terminal devices.
§ 15.117 TV broadcast receivers.
§ 15.118 Cable ready consumer electronics equipment.
§ 15.119 Closed caption decoder requirements for analog television
receivers.
§ 15.120 Program blocking technology requirements for television
receivers.
§ 15.121 Scanning receivers and frequency converters used with scanning
receivers.
§ 15.122 Closed caption decoder requirements for digital television
receivers and converter boxes.
§ 15.123 Labeling of digital cable ready products.

Subpart C—Intentional Radiators

§ 15.201 Equipment authorization requirement.
§ 15.202 Certified operating frequency range.
§ 15.203 Antenna requirement.
§ 15.204 External radio frequency power amplifiers and antenna
modifications.
§ 15.205 Restricted bands of operation.
§ 15.207 Conducted limits.
§ 15.209 Radiated emission limits; general requirements.
§ 15.211 Tunnel radio systems.
§ 15.212 Modular transmitters.
§ 15.213 Cable locating equipment.
§ 15.214 Cordless telephones.
Radiated Emission Limits, Additional Provisions
§ 15.215 Additional provisions to the general radiated emission
limitations.
§ 15.217 Operation in the band 160–190 kHz.
§ 15.219 Operation in the band 510–1705 kHz.
§ 15.221 Operation in the band 525–1705 kHz.
§ 15.223 Operation in the band 1.705–10 MHz.
§ 15.225 Operation within the band 13.110–14.010 MHz.
§ 15.227 Operation within the band 26.96–27.28 MHz.
§ 15.229 Operation within the band 40.66–40.70 MHz.
§ 15.231 Periodic operation in the band 40.66–40.70 MHz and above 70 MHz.
§ 15.233 Operation within the bands 43.71–44.49 MHz, 46.60–46.98 MHz,
48.75–49.51 MHz and 49.66–50.0 MHz.
§ 15.235 Operation within the band 49.82–49.90 MHz.
§ 15.237 Operation in the bands 72.0–73.0 MHz, 74.6–74.8 MHz and 75.2–76.0
MHz.
§ 15.239 Operation in the band 88–108 MHz.
§ 15.240 Operation in the band 433.5–434.5 MHz.
§ 15.241 Operation in the band 174–216 MHz.
§ 15.242 Operation in the bands 174–216 MHz and 470–668 MHz.
§ 15.243 Operation in the band 890–940 MHz.
§ 15.245 Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2435–2465 MHz, 5785–5815
MHz, 10500–10550 MHz, and 24075–24175 MHz.
§ 15.247 Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, and
5725–5850 MHz.
§ 15.249 Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz,
5725–5875 MHZ, and 24.0–24.25 GHz.
§ 15.250 Operation of wideband systems within the band 5925–7250 MHz.
§ 15.251 Operation within the bands 2.9–3.26 GHz, 3.267–3.332 GHz,
3.339–3.3458 GHz, and 3.358–3.6 GHz.
§ 15.252 Operation of wideband vehicular radar systems within the bands
16.2–17.7 GHz and 23.12–29.0 GHz.
§ 15.253 Operation within the bands 46.7–46.9 GHz and 76.0–77.0 GHz.
§ 15.255 Operation within the band 57–64 GHz.
§ 15.257 Operation within the band 92–95 GHz.

Subpart D—Unlicensed Personal Communications Service Devices

§ 15.301 Scope.
§ 15.303 Definitions.
§ 15.305 Equipment authorization requirement.
§ 15.307 Coordination with fixed microwave service.
§ 15.309 Cross reference.
§ 15.311 Labeling requirements.
§ 15.313 Measurement procedures.
§ 15.315 Conducted limits.
§ 15.317 Antenna requirement.
§ 15.319 General technical requirements.
§ 15.321 [Reserved]
§ 15.323 Specific requirements for devices operating in the 1920–1930 MHz
sub-band.

Subpart E—Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure Devices

§ 15.401 Scope.
§ 15.403 Definitions.
§ 15.405 Cross reference.
§ 15.407 General technical requirements.

Subpart F—Ultra-Wideband Operation

§ 15.501 Scope.
§ 15.503 Definitions.
§ 15.505 Cross reference.
§ 15.507 Marketing of UWB equipment.
§ 15.509 Technical requirements for ground penetrating radars and wall
imaging systems.
§ 15.510 Technical requirements for through D-wall imaging systems.
§ 15.511 Technical requirements for surveillance systems.
§ 15.513 Technical requirements for medical imaging systems.
§ 15.515 Technical requirements for vehicular radar systems.
§ 15.517 Technical requirements for indoor UWB systems.
§ 15.519 Technical requirements for hand held UWB systems.
§ 15.521 Technical requirements applicable to all UWB devices.
§ 15.523 Measurement procedures.
§ 15.525 Coordination requirements.

Subpart G—Access Broadband Over Power Line (Access BPL)

§ 15.601 Scope.
§ 15.603 Definitions.
§ 15.605 Cross reference.
§ 15.607 Equipment authorization of Access BPL equipment.
§ 15.609 Marketing of Access BPL equipment.
§ 15.611 General technical requirements.
§ 15.613 Measurement procedures.
§ 15.615 General administrative requirements.
___________________________________

Authority: 47 U.S.C. 154, 302a, 303, 304, 307, 336, and 544a.

Source: 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, unless otherwise noted.

Subpart A—General

top

§ 15.1 Scope of this part.

top

(a) This part sets out the regulations under which an intentional,
unintentional, or incidental radiator may be operated without an individual
license. It also contains the technical specifications, administrative
requirements and other conditions relating to the marketing of part 15
devices.

(b) The operation of an intentional or unintentional radiator that is not in
accordance with the regulations in this part must be licensed pursuant to
the provisions of section 301 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended,
unless otherwise exempted from the licensing requirements elsewhere in this
chapter.

(c) Unless specifically exempted, the operation or marketing of an
intentional or unintentional radiator that is not in compliance with the
administrative and technical provisions in this part, including prior
Commission authorization or verification, as appropriate, is prohibited
under section 302 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, and subpart
I of part 2 of this chapter. The equipment authorization and verification
procedures are detailed in subpart J of part 2 of this chapter.

§ 15.3 Definitions.

top

(a) Auditory assistance device. An intentional radiator used to provide
auditory assistance to a handicapped person or persons. Such a device may be
used for auricular training in an education institution, for auditory
assistance at places of public gatherings, such as a church, theater, or
auditorium, and for auditory assistance to handicapped individuals, only, in
other locations.

(b) Biomedical telemetry device. An intentional radiator used to transmit
measurements of either human or animal biomedical phenomena to a receiver.

(c) Cable input selector switch. A transfer switch that is intended as a
means to alternate between the reception of broadcast signals via connection
to an antenna and the reception of cable television service.

(d) Cable locating equipment. An intentional radiator used intermittently by
trained operators to locate buried cables, lines, pipes, and similar
structures or elements. Operation entails coupling a radio frequency signal
onto the cable, pipes, etc. and using a receiver to detect the location of
that structure or element.

(e) Cable system terminal device (CSTD). A TV interface device that serves,
as its primary function, to connect a cable system operated under part 76 of
this chapter to a TV broadcast receiver or other subscriber premise
equipment. Any device which functions as a CSTD in one of its operating
modes must comply with the technical requirements for such devices when
operating in that mode.

(f) Carrier current system. A system, or part of a system, that transmits
radio frequency energy by conduction over the electric power lines. A
carrier current system can be designed such that the signals are received by
conduction directly from connection to the electric power lines
(unintentional radiator) or the signals are received over-the-air due to
radiation of the radio frequency signals from the electric power lines
(intentional radiator).

(g) CB receiver. Any receiver that operates in the Personal Radio Services
on frequencies allocated for Citizens Band (CB) Radio Service stations, as
well as any receiver provided with a separate band specifically designed to
receive the transmissions of CB stations in the Personal Radio Services.
This includes the following: (1) A CB receiver sold as a separate unit of
equipment; (2) the receiver section of a CB transceiver; (3) a converter to
be used with any receiver for the purpose of receiving CB transmissions;
and, (4) a multiband receiver that includes a band labelled “CB” or
“11-meter” in which such band can be separately selected, except that an
Amateur Radio Service receiver that was manufactured prior to January 1,
1960, and which includes an 11-meter band shall not be considered to be a CB
receiver.

(h) Class A digital device. A digital device that is marketed for use in a
commercial, industrial or business environment, exclusive of a device which
is marketed for use by the general public or is intended to be used in the
home.

(i) Class B digital device. A digital device that is marketed for use in a
residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial, business and
industrial environments. Examples of such devices include, but are not
limited to, personal computers, calculators, and similar electronic devices
that are marketed for use by the general public.

Note: The responsible party may also qualify a device intended to be
marketed in a commercial, business or industrial environment as a Class B
device, and in fact is encouraged to do so, provided the device complies
with the technical specifications for a Class B digital device. In the event
that a particular type of device has been found to repeatedly cause harmful
interference to radio communications, the Commission may classify such a
digital device as a Class B digital device, regardless of its intended use.

(j) Cordless telephone system. A system consisting of two transceivers, one
a base station that connects to the public switched telephone network and
the other a mobile handset unit that communicates directly with the base
station. Transmissions from the mobile unit are received by the base station
and then placed on the public switched telephone network. Information
received from the switched telephone network is transmitted by the base
station to the mobile unit.

Note: The Domestic Public Cellular Radio Telecommunications Service is
considered to be part of the switched telephone network. In addition,
intercom and paging operations are permitted provided these are not intended
to be the primary modes of operation.

(k) Digital device. (Previously defined as a computing device). An
unintentional radiator (device or system) that generates and uses timing
signals or pulses at a rate in excess of 9,000 pulses (cycles) per second
and uses digital techniques; inclusive of telephone equipment that uses
digital techniques or any device or system that generates and uses radio
frequency energy for the purpose of performing data processing functions,
such as electronic computations, operations, transformations, recording,
filing, sorting, storage, retrieval, or transfer. A radio frequency device
that is specifically subject to an emanation requirement in any other FCC
Rule part or an intentional radiator subject to subpart C of this part that
contains a digital device is not subject to the standards for digital
devices, provided the digital device is used only to enable operation of the
radio frequency device and the digital device does not control additional
functions or capabilities.

Note: Computer terminals and peripherals that are intended to be connected
to a computer are digital devices.

(l) Field disturbance sensor. A device that establishes a radio frequency
field in its vicinity and detects changes in that field resulting from the
movement of persons or objects within its range.

(m) Harmful interference. Any emission, radiation or induction that
endangers the functioning of a radio navigation service or of other safety
services or seriously degrades, obstructs or repeatedly interrupts a
radiocommunications service operating in accordance with this chapter.

(n) Incidental radiator. A device that generates radio frequency energy
during the course of its operation although the device is not intentionally
designed to generate or emit radio frequency energy. Examples of incidental
radiators are dc motors, mechanical light switches, etc.

(o) Intentional radiator. A device that intentionally generates and emits
radio frequency energy by radiation or induction.

(p) Kit. Any number of electronic parts, usually provided with a schematic
diagram or printed circuit board, which, when assembled in accordance with
instructions, results in a device subject to the regulations in this part,
even if additional parts of any type are required to complete assembly.

(q) Perimeter protection system. A field disturbance sensor that employs RF
transmission lines as the radiating source. These RF transmission lines are
installed in such a manner that allows the system to detect movement within
the protected area.

(r) Peripheral device. An input/output unit of a system that feeds data into
and/or receives data from the central processing unit of a digital device.
Peripherals to a digital device include any device that is connected
external to the digital device, any device internal to the digital device
that connects the digital device to an external device by wire or cable, and
any circuit board designed for interchangeable mounting, internally or
externally, that increases the operating or processing speed of a digital
device, e.g., “turbo” cards and “enhancement” boards. Examples of peripheral
devices include terminals, printers, external floppy disk drives and other
data storage devices, video monitors, keyboards, interface boards, external
memory expansion cards, and other input/output devices that may or may not
contain digital circuitry. This definition does not include CPU boards, as
defined in paragraph (bb) of this section, even though a CPU board may
connect to an external keyboard or other components.

(s) Personal computer. An electronic computer that is marketed for use in
the home, notwithstanding business applications. Such computers are
considered Class B digital devices. Computers which use a standard TV
receiver as a display device or meet all of the following conditions are
considered examples of personal computers:

(1) Marketed through a retail outlet or direct mail order catalog.

(2) Notices of sale or advertisements are distributed or directed to the
general public or hobbyist users rather than restricted to commercial users.

(3) Operates on a battery or 120 volt electrical supply.

If the responsible party can demonstrate that because of price or
performance the computer is not suitable for residential or hobbyist use, it
may request that the computer be considered to fall outside of the scope of
this definition for personal computers.

(t) Power line carrier systems. An unintentional radiator employed as a
carrier current system used by an electric power utility entity on
transmission lines for protective relaying, telemetry, etc. for general
supervision of the power system. The system operates by the transmission of
radio frequency energy by conduction over the electric power transmission
lines of the system. The system does not include those electric lines which
connect the distribution substation to the customer or house wiring.

(u) Radio frequency (RF) energy. Electromagnetic energy at any frequency in
the radio spectrum between 9 kHz and 3,000,000 MHz.

(v) Scanning receiver. For the purpose of this part, this is a receiver that
automatically switches among two or more frequencies in the range of 30 to
960 MHz and that is capable of stopping at and receiving a radio signal
detected on a frequency. Receivers designed solely for the reception of the
broadcast signals under part 73 of this chapter, for the reception of NOAA
broadcast weather band signals, or for operation as part of a licensed
service are not included in this definition.

(w) Television (TV) broadcast receiver. A device designed to receive
television pictures that are broadcast simultaneously with sound on the
television channels authorized under part 73 of this chapter.

(x) Transfer switch. A device used to alternate between the reception of
over-the-air radio frequency signals via connection to an antenna and the
reception of radio frequency signals received by any other method, such as
from a TV interface device.

(y) TV interface device. An unintentional radiator that produces or
translates in frequency a radio frequency carrier modulated by a video
signal derived from an external or internal signal source, and which feeds
the modulated radio frequency energy by conduction to the antenna terminals
or other non-baseband input connections of a television broadcast receiver.
A TV interface device may include a stand-alone RF modulator, or a composite
device consisting of an RF modulator, video source and other components
devices. Examples of TV interface devices are video cassette recorders and
terminal devices attached to a cable system or used with a Master Antenna
(including those used for central distribution video devices in apartment or
office buildings).

(z) Unintentional radiator. A device that intentionally generates radio
frequency energy for use within the device, or that sends radio frequency
signals by conduction to associated equipment via connecting wiring, but
which is not intended to emit RF energy by radiation or induction.

(aa) Cable ready consumer electronics equipment. Consumer electronics TV
receiving devices, including TV receivers, videocassette recorders and
similar devices, that incorporate a tuner capable of receiving television
signals and an input terminal intended for receiving cable television
service, and are marketed as “cable ready” or “cable compatible.” Such
equipment shall comply with the technical standards specified in §15.118 and
the provisions of §15.19(d).

(bb) CPU board. A circuit board that contains a microprocessor, or frequency
determining circuitry for the microprocessor, the primary function of which
is to execute user-provided programming, but not including:

(1) A circuit board that contains only a microprocessor intended to operate
under the primary control or instruction of a microprocessor external to
such a circuit board; or

(2) A circuit board that is a dedicated controller for a storage or
input/output device.

(cc) External radio frequency power amplifier. A device which is not an
integral part of an intentional radiator as manufactured and which, when
used in conjunction with an intentional radiator as a signal source, is
capable of amplifying that signal.

(dd) Test equipment is defined as equipment that is intended primarily for
purposes of performing measurements or scientific investigations. Such
equipment includes, but is not limited to, field strength meters, spectrum
analyzers, and modulation monitors.

(ee) Radar detector. A receiver designed to signal the presence of radio
signals used for determining the speed of motor vehicles. This definition
does not encompass the receiver incorporated within a radar transceiver
certified under the Commission's rules.

(ff) Access Broadband over Power Line (Access BPL). A carrier current system
installed and operated on an electric utility service as an unintentional
radiator that sends radio frequency energy on frequencies between 1.705 MHz
and 80 MHz over medium voltage lines or over low voltage lines to provide
broadband communications and is located on the supply side of the utility
service's points of interconnection with customer premises. Access BPL does
not include power line carrier systems as defined in §15.3(t) or In-House
BPL as defined in §15.3(gg).

(gg) In-House Broadband over Power Line (In-House BPL). A carrier current
system, operating as an unintentional radiator, that sends radio frequency
energy by conduction over electric power lines that are not owned, operated
or controlled by an electric service provider. The electric power lines may
be aerial (overhead), underground, or inside the walls, floors or ceilings
of user premises. In-House BPL devices may establish closed networks within
a user's premises or provide connections to Access BPL networks, or both.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 18340 , May 2, 1990; 57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992; 59 FR 25340 , May 16, 1994; 61 FR 31048 , June 19, 1996;
62 FR 26242 , May 13, 1997; 64 FR 22561 , Apr. 27, 1999; 65 FR 64391 , Oct. 27,
2000; 66 FR 32582 , June 15, 2001; 67 FR 48993 , July 29, 2002; 70 FR 1373 ,
Jan. 7, 2005]

§ 15.5 General conditions of operation.

top

(a) Persons operating intentional or unintentional radiators shall not be
deemed to have any vested or recognizable right to continued use of any
given frequency by virtue of prior registration or certification of
equipment, or, for power line carrier systems, on the basis of prior
notification of use pursuant to §90.63(g) of this chapter.

(b) Operation of an intentional, unintentional, or incidental radiator is
subject to the conditions that no harmful interference is caused and that
interference must be accepted that may be caused by the operation of an
authorized radio station, by another intentional or unintentional radiator,
by industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) equipment, or by an incidental
radiator.

(c) The operator of a radio frequency device shall be required to cease
operating the device upon notification by a Commission representative that
the device is causing harmful interference. Operation shall not resume until
the condition causing the harmful interference has been corrected.

(d) Intentional radiators that produce Class B emissions (damped wave) are
prohibited.

§ 15.7 [Reserved]

top

§ 15.9 Prohibition against eavesdropping.

top

Except for the operations of law enforcement officers conducted under lawful
authority, no person shall use, either directly or indirectly, a device
operated pursuant to the provisions of this part for the purpose of
overhearing or recording the private conversations of others unless such use
is authorized by all of the parties engaging in the conversation.

§ 15.11 Cross reference.

top

The provisions of subparts A, H, I, J and K of part 2 apply to intentional
and unintentional radiators, in addition to the provisions of this part.
Also, a cable system terminal device and a cable input selector switch shall
be subject to the relevant provisions of part 76 of this chapter.

§ 15.13 Incidental radiators.

top

Manufacturers of these devices shall employ good engineering practices to
minimize the risk of harmful interference.

§ 15.15 General technical requirements.

top

(a) An intentional or unintentional radiator shall be constructed in
accordance with good engineering design and manufacturing practice.
Emanations from the device shall be suppressed as much as practicable, but
in no case shall the emanations exceed the levels specified in these rules.

(b) Except as follows, an intentional or unintentional radiator must be
constructed such that the adjustments of any control that is readily
accessible by or intended to be accessible to the user will not cause
operation of the device in violation of the regulations. Access BPL
equipment shall comply with the applicable standards at the control
adjustment that is employed. The measurement report used in support of an
application for Certification and the user instructions for Access BPL
equipment shall clearly specify the user-or installer-control settings that
are required for conformance with these regulations.

(c) Parties responsible for equipment compliance should note that the limits
specified in this part will not prevent harmful interference under all
circumstances. Since the operators of part 15 devices are required to cease
operation should harmful interference occur to authorized users of the radio
frequency spectrum, the parties responsible for equipment compliance are
encouraged to employ the minimum field strength necessary for
communications, to provide greater attenuation of unwanted emissions than
required by these regulations, and to advise the user as to how to resolve
harmful interference problems (for example, see §15.105(b)).

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 70 FR 1373 , Jan. 7, 2005]

§ 15.17 Susceptibility to interference.

top

(a) Parties responsible for equipment compliance are advised to consider the
proximity and the high power of non-Government licensed radio stations, such
as broadcast, amateur, land mobile, and non-geostationary mobile satellite
feeder link earth stations, and of U.S. Government radio stations, which
could include high-powered radar systems, when choosing operating
frequencies during the design of their equipment so as to reduce the
susceptibility for receiving harmful interference. Information on
non-Government use of the spectrum can be obtained by consulting the Table
of Frequency Allocations in §2.106 of this chapter.

(b) Information on U.S. Government operations can be obtained by contacting:
Director, Spectrum Plans and Policy, National Telecommunications and
Information Administration, Department of Commerce, Room 4096, Washington,
DC 20230.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 62 FR 4655 , Jan. 31, 1997; 63 FR 40835 , July 31, 1998]

§ 15.19 Labelling requirements.

top

(a) In addition to the requirements in part 2 of this chapter, a device
subject to certification, or verification shall be labelled as follows:

(1) Receivers associated with the operation of a licensed radio service,
e.g., FM broadcast under part 73 of this chapter, land mobile operation
under part 90, etc., shall bear the following statement in a conspicuous
location on the device:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.

(2) A stand-alone cable input selector switch, shall bear the following
statement in a conspicuous location on the device:

This device is verified to comply with part 15 of the FCC Rules for use with
cable television service.

(3) All other devices shall bear the following statement in a conspicuous
location on the device:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

(4) Where a device is constructed in two or more sections connected by wires
and marketed together, the statement specified under paragraph (a) of this
section is required to be affixed only to the main control unit.

(5) When the device is so small or for such use that it is not practicable
to place the statement specified under paragraph (a) of this section on it,
the information required by this paragraph shall be placed in a prominent
location in the instruction manual or pamphlet supplied to the user or,
alternatively, shall be placed on the container in which the device is
marketed. However, the FCC identifier or the unique identifier, as
appropriate, must be displayed on the device.

(b) Products subject to authorization under a Declaration of Conformity
shall be labelled as follows:

(1) The label shall be located in a conspicuous location on the device and
shall contain the unique identification described in §2.1074 of this chapter
and the following logo:

(i) If the product is authorized based on testing of the product or system;
or
[er09de03.000.gif]

View or download PDF

(ii) If a personal computer is authorized based on assembly using separately
authorized components, in accordance with §15.101(c)(2) or (c)(3), and the
resulting product is not separately tested:
[er09de03.001.gif]

View or download PDF

(2) Label text and information should be in a size of type large enough to
be readily legible, consistent with the dimensions of the equipment and the
label. However, the type size for the text is not required to be larger than
eight point.

(3) When the device is so small or for such use that it is not practicable
to place the statement specified under paragraph (b)(1) of this section on
it, such as for a CPU board or a plug-in circuit board peripheral device,
the text associated with the logo may be placed in a prominent location in
the instruction manual or pamphlet supplied to the user. However, the unique
identification (trade name and model number) and the logo must be displayed
on the device.

(4) The label shall not be a stick-on, paper label. The label on these
products shall be permanently affixed to the product and shall be readily
visible to the purchaser at the time of purchase, as described in §2.925(d)
of this chapter. “Permanently affixed” means that the label is etched,
engraved, stamped, silkscreened, indelibly printed, or otherwise permanently
marked on a permanently attached part of the equipment or on a nameplate of
metal, plastic, or other material fastened to the equipment by welding,
riveting, or a permanent adhesive. The label must be designed to last the
expected lifetime of the equipment in the environment in which the equipment
may be operated and must not be readily detachable.

(d) Consumer electronics TV receiving devices, including TV receivers,
videocassette recorders, and similar devices, that incorporate features
intended to be used with cable television service, but do not fully comply
with the technical standards for cable ready equipment set forth in §15.118,
shall not be marketed with terminology that describes the device as “cable
ready” or “cable compatible,” or that otherwise conveys the impression that
the device is fully compatible with cable service. Factual statements about
the various features of a device that are intended for use with cable
service or the quality of such features are acceptable so long as such
statements do not imply that the device is fully compatible with cable
service. Statements relating to product features are generally acceptable
where they are limited to one or more specific features of a device, rather
than the device as a whole. This requirement applies to consumer TV
receivers, videocassette recorders and similar devices manufactured or
imported for sale in this country on or after October 31, 1994.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 59 FR 25341 , May 16, 1994; 61 FR 18509 , Apr. 26, 1996; 61 FR 31048 , June 19, 1996; 62 FR 41881 , Aug. 4, 1997;
63 FR 36602 , July 7, 1998; 65 FR 64391 , Oct. 27, 2000; 68 FR 66733 , Nov. 28,
2003; 68 FR 68545 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.21 Information to user.

top

The users manual or instruction manual for an intentional or unintentional
radiator shall caution the user that changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment. In cases where the manual is provided
only in a form other than paper, such as on a computer disk or over the
Internet, the information required by this section may be included in the
manual in that alternative form, provided the user can reasonably be
expected to have the capability to access information in that form.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 68 FR 68545 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.23 Home-built devices.

top

(a) Equipment authorization is not required for devices that are not
marketed, are not constructed from a kit, and are built in quantities of
five or less for personal use.

(b) It is recognized that the individual builder of home-built equipment may
not possess the means to perform the measurements for determining compliance
with the regulations. In this case, the builder is expected to employ good
engineering practices to meet the specified technical standards to the
greatest extent practicable. The provisions of §15.5 apply to this
equipment.

§ 15.25 Kits.

top

A TV interface device, including a cable system terminal device, which is
marketed as a kit shall comply with the following requirements:

(a) All parts necessary for the assembled device to comply with the
technical requirements of this part must be supplied with the kit. No
mechanism for adjustment that can cause operation in violation of the
requirements of this part shall be made accessible to the builder.

(b) At least two units of the kit shall be assembled in exact accordance
with the instructions supplied with the product to be marketed. If all
components required to fully complete the kit (other than those specified in
paragraph (a) of this section which are needed for compliance with the
technical provisions and must be included with the kit) are not normally
furnished with the kit, assembly shall be made using the recommended
components. The assembled units shall be certified or authorized under the
Declaration of Conformity procedure, as appropriate, pursuant to the
requirements of this part.

(1) The measurement data required for a TV interface device subject to
certification shall be obtained for each of the two units and submitted with
an application for certification pursuant to subpart J of part 2 of this
chapter.

(2) The measurement data required for a TV interface device subject to
Declaration of Conformity shall be obtained for the units tested and
retained on file pursuant to the provisions of subpart J of part 2 of this
chapter.

(c) A copy of the exact instructions that will be provided for assembly of
the device shall be submitted with an application for certification. Those
parts which are not normally furnished shall be detailed in the application
for equipment authorization.

(d) In lieu of the label required by §15.19, the following label, along with
the label bearing the FCC identifier and other information specified in
§§2.925 and 2.926, shall be included in the kit with instructions to the
builder that it shall be attached to the completed kit:

(Name of Grantee)

(FCC Identifier)

This device can be expected to comply with part 15 of the FCC Rules provided
it is assembled in exact accordance with the instructions provided with this
kit. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

(e) For the purpose of this section, circuit boards used as repair parts for
the replacement of electrically identical defective circuit boards are not
considered to be kits.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989,as amended at 63 FR 36602 , July 7, 1998]

§ 15.27 Special accessories.

top

(a) Equipment marketed to a consumer must be capable of complying with the
necessary regulations in the configuration in which the equipment is
marketed. Where special accessories, such as shielded cables and/or special
connectors, are required to enable an unintentional or intentional radiator
to comply with the emission limits in this part, the equipment must be
marketed with, i.e., shipped and sold with, those special accessories.
However, in lieu of shipping or packaging the special accessories with the
unintentional or intentional radiator, the responsible party may employ
other methods of ensuring that the special accessories are provided to the
consumer, without additional charge, at the time of purchase. Information
detailing any alternative method used to supply the special accessories
shall be included in the application for a grant of equipment authorization
or retained in the verification records, as appropriate. The party
responsible for the equipment, as detailed in §2.909 of this chapter, shall
ensure that these special accessories are provided with the equipment. The
instruction manual for such devices shall include appropriate instructions
on the first page of the text concerned with the installation of the device
that these special accessories must be used with the device. It is the
responsibility of the user to use the needed special accessories supplied
with the equipment. In cases where the manual is provided only in a form
other than paper, such as on a computer disk or over the Internet, the
information required by this section may be included in the manual in that
alternative form, provided the user can reasonably be expected to have the
capability to access information in that form.

(b) If a device requiring special accessories is installed by or under the
supervision of the party marketing the device, it is the responsibility of
that party to install the equipment using the special accessories. For
equipment requiring professional installation, it is not necessary for the
responsible party to market the special accessories with the equipment.
However, the need to use the special accessories must be detailed in the
instruction manual, and it is the responsibility of the installer to provide
and to install the required accessories.

(c) Accessory items that can be readily obtained from multiple retail
outlets are not considered to be special accessories and are not required to
be marketed with the equipment. The manual included with the equipment must
specify what additional components or accessories are required to be used in
order to ensure compliance with this part, and it is the responsibility of
the user to provide and use those components and accessories.

(d) The resulting system, including any accessories or components marketed
with the equipment, must comply with the regulations.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 68 FR 68545 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.29 Inspection by the Commission.

top

(a) Any equipment or device subject to the provisions of this part, together
with any certificate, notice of registration or any technical data required
to be kept on file by the operator, supplier or party responsible for
compliance of the device shall be made available for inspection by a
Commission representative upon reasonable request.

(b) The owner or operator of a radio frequency device subject to this part
shall promptly furnish to the Commission or its representative such
information as may be requested concerning the operation of the radio
frequency device.

(c) The party responsible for the compliance of any device subject to this
part shall promptly furnish to the Commission or its representatives such
information as may be requested concerning the operation of the device,
including a copy of any measurements made for obtaining an equipment
authorization or demonstrating compliance with the regulations.

(d) The Commission, from time to time, may request the party responsible for
compliance, including an importer, to submit to the FCC Laboratory in
Columbia, Maryland, various equipment to determine that the equipment
continues to comply with the applicable standards. Shipping costs to the
Commission's Laboratory and return shall be borne by the responsible party.
Testing by the Commission will be performed using the measurement
procedure(s) that was in effect at the time the equipment was authorized or
verified.

§ 15.31 Measurement standards.

top

(a) The following measurement procedures are used by the Commission to
determine compliance with the technical requirements in this part. Except
where noted, copies of these procedures are available from the Commission's
current duplicating contractor whose name and address are available from the
Commission's Consumer and Governmental Affairs Bureau at 1–888–CALL-FCC
(1–888–225–5322).

(1) FCC/OET MP–2: Measurement of UHF Noise Figures of TV Receivers.

(2) Unlicensed Personal Communication Service (UPCS) devices are to be
measured for compliance using ANSI C63.17–1998: “Methods of Measurement of
the Electromagnetic and Operational Compatibility of Unlicensed Personal
Communications Services (UPCS) Devices”, (incorporated by reference, see
§15.38). This incorporation by reference was approved by the Director of the
Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.

(3) Other intentional and unintentional radiators are to be measured for
compliance using the following procedure excluding sections 4.1.5.2, 5.7, 9
and 14: ANSI C63.4–2003: “Methods of Measurement of Radio-Noise Emissions
from Low-Voltage Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the Range of 9 kHz
to 40 GHz” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38). This incorporation by
reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.

Note to paragraph(a)(3): Digital devices tested to show compliance with the
provisions of §§15.107(e) and 15.109(g) must be tested following the ANSI
C63.4 procedure described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.

(b) All parties making compliance measurements on equipment subject to the
requirements of this part are urged to use these measurement procedures. Any
party using other procedures should ensure that such other procedures can be
relied on to produce measurement results compatible with the FCC measurement
procedures. The description of the measurement procedure used in testing the
equipment for compliance and a list of the test equipment actually employed
shall be made part of an application for certification or included with the
data required to be retained by the party responsible for devices authorized
pursuant to a Declaration of Conformity or devices subject to verification.

(c) For swept frequency equipment, measurements shall be made with the
frequency sweep stopped at those frequencies chosen for the measurements to
be reported.

(d) Field strength measurements shall be made, to the extent possible, on an
open field site. Test sites other than open field sites may be employed if
they are properly calibrated so that the measurement results correspond to
what would be obtained from an open field site. In the case of equipment for
which measurements can be performed only at the installation site, such as
perimeter protection systems, carrier current systems, and systems employing
a “leaky” coaxial cable as an antenna, measurements for verification or for
obtaining a grant of equipment authorization shall be performed at a minimum
of three installations that can be demonstrated to be representative of
typical installation sites.

(e) For intentional radiators, measurements of the variation of the input
power or the radiated signal level of the fundamental frequency component of
the emission, as appropriate, shall be performed with the supply voltage
varied between 85% and 115% of the nominal rated supply voltage. For battery
operated equipment, the equipment tests shall be performed using a new
battery.

(f) To the extent practicable, the device under test shall be measured at
the distance specified in the appropriate rule section. The distance
specified corresponds to the horizontal distance between the measurement
antenna and the closest point of the equipment under test, support equipment
or interconnecting cables as determined by the boundary defined by an
imaginary straight line periphery describing a simple geometric
configuration enclosing the system containing the equipment under test. The
equipment under test, support equipment and any interconnecting cables shall
be included within this boundary.

(1) At frequencies at or above 30 MHz, measurements may be performed at a
distance other than what is specified provided: measurements are not made in
the near field except where it can be shown that near field measurements are
appropriate due to the characteristics of the device; and it can be
demonstrated that the signal levels needed to be measured at the distance
employed can be detected by the measurement equipment. Measurements shall
not be performed at a distance greater than 30 meters unless it can be
further demonstrated that measurements at a distance of 30 meters or less
are impractical. When performing measurements at a distance other than that
specified, the results shall be extrapolated to the specified distance using
an extrapolation factor of 20 dB/decade (inverse linear-distance for field
strength measurements; inverse-linear-distance-squared for power density
measurements).

(2) At frequencies below 30 MHz, measurements may be performed at a distance
closer than that specified in the regulations; however, an attempt should be
made to avoid making measurements in the near field. Pending the development
of an appropriate measurement procedure for measurements performed below 30
MHz, when performing measurements at a closer distance than specified, the
results shall be extrapolated to the specified distance by either making
measurements at a minimum of two distances on at least one radial to
determine the proper extrapolation factor or by using the square of an
inverse linear distance extrapolation factor (40 dB/decade).

(3) The applicant for a grant of certification shall specify the
extrapolation method used in the application filed with the Commission. For
equipment subject to Declaration of Conformity or verification, this
information shall be retained with the measurement data.

(4) When measurement distances of 30 meters or less are specified in the
regulations, the Commission will test the equipment at the distance
specified unless measurement at that distance results in measurements being
performed in the near field. When measurement distances of greater than 30
meters are specified in the regulations, the Commission will test the
equipment at a closer distance, usually 30 meters, extrapolating the
measured field strength to the specified distance using the methods shown in
this section.

(5) Measurements shall be performed at a sufficient number of radials around
the equipment under test to determine the radial at which the field strength
values of the radiated emissions are maximized. The maximum field strength
at the frequency being measured shall be reported in the equipment
authorization report. This paragraph shall not apply to Access BPL equipment
on overhead medium voltage lines. In lieu thereof, the measurement
guidelines established by the Commission for Access BPL shall be followed.

(g) Equipment under test shall be adjusted, using those controls that are
readily accessible to or are intended to be accessible to the consumer, in
such a manner as to maximize the level of the emissions. For those devices
to which wire leads may be attached by the consumer, tests shall be
performed with wire leads attached. The wire leads shall be of the length to
be used with the equipment if that length is known. Otherwise, wire leads
one meter in length shall be attached to the equipment. Longer wire leads
may be employed if necessary to interconnect to associated peripherals.

(h) For a composite system that incorporates devices contained either in a
single enclosure or in separate enclosures connected by wire or cable,
testing for compliance with the standards in this part shall be performed
with all of the devices in the system functioning. If an intentional
radiator incorporates more than one antenna or other radiating source and
these radiating sources are designed to emit at the same time, measurements
of conducted and radiated emissions shall be performed with all radiating
sources that are to be employed emitting. A device which incorporates a
carrier current system shall be tested as if the carrier current system were
incorporated in a separate device; that is, the device shall be tested for
compliance with whatever rules would apply to the device were the carrier
current system not incorporated, and the carrier current system shall be
tested for compliance with the rules applicable to carrier current systems.

(i) If the device under test provides for the connection of external
accessories, including external electrical input signals, the device shall
be tested with the accessories attached. The device under test shall be
fully exercised with these external accessories. The emission tests shall be
performed with the device and accessories configured in a manner that tends
to produce maximized emissions within the range of variations that can be
expected under normal operating conditions. In the case of multiple
accessory external ports, an external accessory shall be connected to one of
each type of port. Only one test using peripherals or external accessories
that are representative of the devices that will be employed with the
equipment under test is required. All possible equipment combinations do not
need to be tested. The accessories or peripherals connected to the device
being tested shall be unmodified, commercially available equipment.

(j) If the equipment under test consists of a central control unit and an
external or internal accessory(ies) (peripheral) and the party verifying the
equipment or applying for a grant of equipment authorization manufactures or
assembles the central control unit and at least one of the accessory devices
that can be used with that control unit, testing of the control unit and/or
the accessory(ies) must be performed using the devices manufactured or
assembled by that party, in addition to any other needed devices which the
party does not manufacture or assemble. If the party verifying the equipment
or applying for a grant of equipment authorization does not manufacture or
assemble the central control unit and at least one of the accessory devices
that can be used with that control unit or the party can demonstrate that
the central control unit or accessory(ies) normally would be marketed or
used with equipment from a different entity, testing of the central control
unit and/or the accessory(ies) must be performed using the specific
combination of equipment which is intended to be marketed or used together.
Only one test using peripherals or accessories that are representatve of the
devices that will be employed with the equipment under test is required. All
possible equipment combinations are not required to be tested. The
accessories or peripherals connected to the device being tested shall be
unmodified, commercially available equipment.

(k) A composite system is a system that incorporates different devices
contained either in a single enclosure or in separate enclosures connected
by wire or cable. If the individual devices in a composite system are
subject to different technical standards, each such device must comply with
its specific standards. In no event may the measured emissions of the
composite system exceed the highest level permitted for an individual
component. For digital devices which consist of a combination of Class A and
Class B devices, the total combination of which results in a Class A digital
device, it is only necessary to demonstrate that the equipment combination
complies with the limits for a Class A device. This equipment combination
may not be employed for obtaining a grant of equipment authorization or
verifying a Class B digital device. However, if the digital device
combination consists of a Class B central control unit, e.g., a personal
computer, and a Class A internal peripheral(s), it must be demonstrated that
the Class B central control unit continues to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device with the Class A internal peripheral(s) installed but
not active.

(l) Measurements of radio frequency emissions conducted to the public
utility power lines shall be performed using a 50 ohm/50 uH line-impedance
stabilization network (LISN).

Note: Receivers tested under the transition provisions contained in §15.37
may be tested with a 50 ohm/5 μH LISN.

(m) Measurements on intentional radiators or receivers, other than TV
broadcast receivers, shall be performed and, if required, reported for each
band in which the device can be operated with the device operating at the
number of frequencies in each band specified in the following table:
Frequency range over which device operates Number of frequencies Location in
the range of operation
1 MHz or less 1 Middle.
1 to 10 MHz 2 1 near top and 1 near bottom.
More than 10 MHz 3 1 near top, 1 near middle and 1 near bottom.

(n) Measurements on TV broadcast receivers shall be performed with the
receiver tuned to each VHF frequency and also shall include the following
oscillator frequencies: 520, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900 and 931
MHz. If measurements cannot be made on one or more of the latter UHF
frequencies because of the presence of signals from licensed radio stations
or for other reasons to be detailed in the measurement report, measurements
shall be made with the receiver oscillator at a nearby frequency. If the
receiver is not capable of receiving channels above 806 MHz, the
measurements employing the oscillator frequencies 900 and 931 MHz may be
omitted.

(o) The amplitude of spurious emissions from intentional radiators and
emissions from unintentional radiators which are attenuated more than 20 dB
below the permissible value need not be reported unless specifically
required elsewhere in this part.

(p) In those cases where the provisions in this section conflict with the
measurement procedures in paragraph (a) of this section and the procedures
were implemented after June 23, 1989, the provisions contained in the
measurement procedures shall take precedence.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 56 FR 13083 , Mar. 29, 1991; 57 FR 24990 , June 12, 1992; 57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992; 58 FR 37430 , July 12,
1993; 58 FR 51249 , Oct. 1, 1993; 61 FR 14502 , Apr. 2, 1996; 62 FR 41881 ,
Aug. 4, 1997; 62 FR 45333 , Aug. 27, 1997; 63 FR 36602 , July 7, 1998; 63 FR 42278 , Aug. 7, 1998; 65 FR 58466 , Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 68545 , Dec. 9, 2003;
69 FR 54034 , Sept. 7, 2004; 70 FR 1373 , Jan. 7, 2005]

§ 15.32 Test procedures for CPU boards and computer power supplies.

top

Power supplies and CPU boards used with personal computers and for which
separate authorizations are required to be obtained shall be tested as
follows:

(a) CPU boards shall be tested as follows:

(1) Testing for radiated emissions shall be performed with the CPU board
installed in a typical enclosure but with the enclosure's cover removed so
that the internal circuitry is exposed at the top and on at least two sides.
Additional components, including a power supply, peripheral devices, and
subassemblies, shall be added, as needed, to result in a complete personal
computer system. If the oscillator and the microprocessor circuits are
contained on separate circuit boards, both boards, typical of the
combination that would normally be employed, must be used in the test.
Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified in §15.31.

(i) Under these test conditions, the system under test shall not exceed the
radiated emission limits specified in §15.109 by more than 6 dB. Emissions
greater than 6 dB that can be identified and documented to originate from a
component(s) other than the CPU board being tested, may be dismissed.

(ii) Unless the test in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section demonstrates
compliance with the limits in §15.109, a second test shall be performed
using the same configuration described above but with the cover installed on
the enclosure. Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified
in §15.31. Under these test conditions, the system under test shall not
exceed the radiated emission limits specified in §15.109.

(2) In lieu of the procedure in (a)(1) of this section, CPU boards may be
tested to demonstrate compliance with the limits in §15.109 using a
specified enclosure with the cover installed. Testing for radiated emissions
shall be performed with the CPU board installed in a typical system
configuration. Additional components, including a power supply, peripheral
devices, and subassemblies, shall be added, as needed, to result in a
complete personal computer system. If the oscillator and the microprocessor
circuits are contained on separate circuit boards, both boards, typical of
the combination that would normally be employed, must be used in the test.
Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified in §15.31.
Under this procedure, CPU boards that comply with the limits in §15.109 must
be marketed together with the specific enclosure used for the test.

(3) The test demonstrating compliance with the AC power line conducted
limits specified in §15.107 shall be performed in accordance with the
procedures specified in §15.31 using an enclosure, peripherals, power supply
and subassemblies that are typical of the type with which the CPU board
under test would normally be employed.

(b) The power supply shall be tested installed in an enclosure that is
typical of the type within which it would normally be installed. Additional
components, including peripheral devices, a CPU board, and subassemblies,
shall be added, as needed, to result in a complete personal computer system.
Testing shall be in accordance with the procedures specified in §15.31 and
must demonstrate compliance with all of the standards contained in this
part.

[ 61 FR 31048 , June 19, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 41881 , Aug. 4, 1997]

§ 15.33 Frequency range of radiated measurements.

top

(a) For an intentional radiator, the spectrum shall be investigated from the
lowest radio frequency signal generated in the device, without going below 9
kHz, up to at least the frequency shown in this paragraph:

(1) If the intentional radiator operates below 10 GHz: to the tenth harmonic
of the highest fundamental frequency or to 40 GHz, whichever is lower.

(2) If the intentional radiator operates at or above 10 GHz and below 30
GHz: to the fifth harmonic of the highest fundamental frequency or to 100
GHz, whichever is lower.

(3) If the intentional radiator operates at or above 30 GHz: to the fifth
harmonic of the highest fundamental frequency or to 200 GHz, whichever is
lower, unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the rules.

(4) If the intentional radiator contains a digital device, regardless of
whether this digital device controls the functions of the intentional
radiator or the digital device is used for additional control or function
purposes other than to enable the operation of the intentional radiator, the
frequency range shall be investigated up to the range specified in
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section or the range applicable to
the digital device, as shown in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, whichever
is the higher frequency range of investigation.

(b) For unintentional radiators:

(1) Except as otherwise indicated in paragraphs (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this
section, for an unintentional radiator, including a digital device, the
spectrum shall be investigated from the lowest radio frequency signal
generated or used in the device, without going below the lowest frequency
for which a radiated emission limit is specified, up to the frequency shown
in the following table:
Highest frequency generated or used in the device or on which the device
operates or tunes (MHz) Upper frequency of measurement range (MHz)
Below 1.705 30.
1.705–108 1000.
108–500 2000.
500–1000 5000.
Above 1000 5th harmonic of the highest frequency or 40 GHz, whichever is
lower.

(2) A unintentional radiator, excluding a digital device, in which the
highest frequency generated in the device, the highest frequency used in the
device and the highest frequency on which the device operates or tunes are
less than 30 MHz and which, in accordance with §15.109, is required to
comply with standards on the level of radiated emissions within the
frequency range 9 kHz to 30 MHz, such as a CB receiver or a device designed
to conduct its radio frequency emissions via connecting wires or cables,
e.g., a carrier current system not intended to radiate, shall be
investigated from the lowest radio frequency generated or used in the
device, without going below 9 kHz (25 MHz for CB receivers), up to the
frequency shown in the following table. If the unintentional radiator
contains a digital device, the upper frequency to be investigated shall be
that shown in the table below or in the table in paragraph (b)(1) of this
section, as based on both the highest frequency generated and the highest
frequency used in the digital device, whichever range is higher.
Highest frequency generated or used in the device or on which the device
operates or tunes (MHz) Upper frequency of measurement range (MHz)
Below 1.705 30
1.705–10 400
10–30 500

(3) Except for a CB receiver, a receiver employing superheterodyne
techniques shall be investigated from 30 MHz up to at least the second
harmonic of the highest local oscillator frequency generated in the device.
If such receiver is controlled by a digital device, the frequency range
shall be investigated up to the higher of the second harmonic of the highest
local oscillator frequency generated in the device or the upper frequency of
the measurement range specified for the digital device in paragraph (b)(1)
of this section.

(c) The above specified frequency ranges of measurements apply to the
measurement of radiated emissions and, in the case of receivers, the
measurement to demonstrate compliance with the antenna conduction limits
specified in §15.111. The frequency range of measurements for AC power line
conducted limits is specified in §§15.107 and 15.207 and applies to all
equipment subject to those regulations. In some cases, depending on the
frequency(ies) generated and used by the equipment, only signals conducted
onto the AC power lines are required to be measured.

(d) Particular attention should be paid to harmonics and subharmonics of the
fundamental frequency as well as to those frequencies removed from the
fundamental by multiples of the oscillator frequency. Radiation at the
frequencies of multiplier states should also be checked.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 61 FR 14502 , Apr. 2, 1996; 63 FR 42278 , Aug. 7, 1998]

§ 15.35 Measurement detector functions and bandwidths.

top

The conducted and radiated emission limits shown in this part are based on
the following, unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this part:

(a) On any frequency or frequencies below or equal to 1000 MHz, the limits
shown are based on measuring equipment employing a CISPR quasi-peak detector
function and related measurement bandwidths, unless otherwise specified. The
specifications for the measuring instrument using the CISPR quasi-peak
detector can be found in Publication 16 of the International Special
Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) of the International
Electrotechnical Commission. As an alternative to CISPR quasi-peak
measurements, the responsible party, at its option, may demonstrate
compliance with the emission limits using measuring equipment employing a
peak detector function, properly adjusted for such factors as pulse
desensitization, as long as the same bandwidths as indicated for CISPR
quasi-peak measurements are employed.

Note: For pulse modulated devices with a pulse-repetition frequency of 20 Hz
or less and for which CISPR quasi-peak measurements are specified,
compliance with the regulations shall be demonstrated using measuring
equipment employing a peak detector function, properly adjusted for such
factors as pulse desensitization, using the same measurement bandwidths that
are indicated for CISPR quasi-peak measurements.

(b) Unless otherwise specified, on any frequency or frequencies above 1000
MHz, the radiated emission limits are based on the use of measurement
instrumentation employing an average detector function. Unless otherwise
specified, measurements above 1000 MHz shall be performed using a minimum
resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz. When average radiated emission measurements
are specified in this part, including average emission measurements below
1000 MHz, there also is a limit on the peak level of the radio frequency
emissions. Unless otherwise specified, e.g. , see §§15.250, 15.252, 15.255,
and 15.509–15.519, the limit on peak radio frequency emissions is 20 dB
above the maximum permitted average emission limit applicable to the
equipment under test. This peak limit applies to the total peak emission
level radiated by the device, e.g. , the total peak power level. Note that
the use of a pulse desensitization correction factor may be needed to
determine the total peak emission level. The instruction manual or
application note for the measurement instrument should be consulted for
determining pulse desensitization factors, as necessary.

(c) Unless otherwise specified, e.g. §15.255(b), when the radiated emission
limits are expressed in terms of the average value of the emission, and
pulsed operation is employed, the measurement field strength shall be
determined by averaging over one complete pulse train, including blanking
intervals, as long as the pulse train does not exceed 0.1 seconds. As an
alternative (provided the transmitter operates for longer than 0.1 seconds)
or in cases where the pulse train exceeds 0.1 seconds, the measured field
strength shall be determined from the average absolute voltage during a 0.1
second interval during which the field strength is at its maximum value. The
exact method of calculating the average field strength shall be submitted
with any application for certification or shall be retained in the
measurement data file for equipment subject to notification or verification.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 56 FR 13083 , Mar. 29, 1991; 61 FR 14502 , Apr. 2, 1996; 63 FR 42279 , Aug. 7, 1998; 67 FR 34855 , May 16, 2002;
70 FR 6773 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.37 Transition provisions for compliance with the rules.

top

Equipment may be authorized, manufactured and imported under the rules in
effect prior to June 23, 1989, in accordance with the following schedules:

(a) For all intentional and unintentional radiators, except for receivers:
Radio frequency equipment verified by the responsible party or for which an
application for a grant of equipment authorization is submitted to the
Commission on or after June 23, 1992, shall comply with the regulations
specified in this part. Radio frequency equipment that is manufactured or
imported on or after June 23, 1994, shall comply with the regulations
specified in this part.

(b) For receivers: Receivers subject to the regulations in this part that
are manufactured or imported on or after June 23, 1999, shall comply with
the regulations specified in this part. However, if a receiver is associated
with a transmitter that could not have been authorized under the regulations
in effect prior to June 23, 1989, e.g., a transmitter operating under the
provisions of §15.209 or §15.249 (below 960 MHz), the transition provisions
in this section do not apply. Such receivers must comply with the
regulations in this part. In addition, receivers are subject to the
provisions in paragraph (f) of this section.

(c) There are no restrictions on the operation or marketing of equipment
complying with the regulations in effect prior to June 23, 1989.

(d) Prior to May 25, 1991, person shall import, market or operate
intentional radiators within the band 902–905 MHz under the provisions of
§15.249. Until that date, the Commission will not issue a grant of equipment
authorization for equipment operating under §15.249 if the equipment is
designed to permit operation within the band 902–905 MHz.

(e) For cordless telephones: The manufacture and importation of cordless
telephones not complying with §15.214(d) of this part shall cease on or
before September 11, 1991. These provisions will not apply to cordless
telephones which are repaired or refurbished, or re-imported after repair or
refurbishment. Applications for a grant of equipment authorization of
cordless telephones not complying with §15.214(d) of this part will not be
accepted by the Commission after May 10, 1991. Cordless telephones that have
previously received equipment authorization and that, without modification,
already comply with the requirements of §15.214(d) of this part, need not be
reauthorized.

(f) The manufacture or importation of scanning receivers, and frequency
converters designed or marketed for use with scanning receivers, that do not
comply with the provisions of §15.121(a)(1) shall cease on or before April
26, 1994. Effective April 26, 1993, the Commission will not grant equipment
authorization for receivers that do not comply with the provisions of
§15.121(a)(1). These rules do not prohibit the sale or use of authorized
receivers manufactured in the United States, or imported into the United
States, prior to April 26, 1994.

(g) For CPU boards and power supplies designed to be used with personal
computers: The manufacture and importation of these products shall cease on
or before June 19, 1997 unless these products have been authorized under a
Declaration of Conformity or a grant of certification, demonstrating
compliance with all of the provisions in this part. Limited provisions, as
detailed in §15.101(d), are provided to permit the importation and
manufacture of these products subsequent to this date where the CPU boards
and/or power supplies are marketed only to personal computer equipment
manufacturers.

(h) The manufacture or importation of scanning receivers, and frequency
converters designed or marketed for use with scanning receivers, that do not
comply with the provisions of §15.121 shall cease on or before October 25,
1999. Effective July 26, 1999 the Commission will not grant equipment
authorization for receivers that do not comply with the provisions of
§15.121. This paragraph does not prohibit the sale or use of authorized
receivers manufactured in the United States, or imported into the United
States, prior to October 25, 1999.

(i) Effective October 16, 2002, an equipment approval may no longer be
obtained for medical telemetry equipment operating under the provisions of
§15.241 or §15.242. The requirements for obtaining an approval for medical
telemetry equipment after this date are found in Subpart H of Part 95 of
this chapter.

(j) All radio frequency devices that are authorized under the certification,
verification or declaration of conformity procedures on or after July 12,
2004 shall comply with the conducted limits specified in §15.107 or §15.207
as appropriate. All radio frequency devices that are manufactured or
imported on or after July 11, 2005 shall comply with the conducted limits
specified in §15.107 or §15.207, as appropriate. Equipment authorized,
imported or manufactured prior to these dates shall comply with the
conducted limits specified in §15.107 or §15.207, as appropriate, or with
the conducted limits that were in effect immediately prior to September 9,
2002.

(k) Radar detectors manufactured or imported after August 28, 2002 and
marketed after September 27, 2002 shall comply with the regulations
specified in this part. Radar detectors manufactured or imported prior to
January 27, 2003 may be labeled with the information required by §§2.925 and
15.19(a) of this chapter on the individual equipment carton rather than on
the device, and are exempt from complying with the requirements of §15.21.

(l) U–NII equipment operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz band for which
applications for certification are filed on or after July 20, 2006 shall
comply with the DFS and TPC requirements specified in §15.407. U–NII
equipment operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz band that are imported or marketed
on or after July 20, 2007 shall comply with the DFS and TPC requirements in
§15.407.

(m) All Access BPL devices that are manufactured, imported, marketed or
installed on or after July 7, 2006, shall comply with the requirements
specified in subpart G of this part, including certification of the
equipment.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989; 54 FR 32339 , Aug. 7, 1989; 55 FR 25095 , June
20, 1990; 56 FR 3785 , Jan. 31, 1991; 58 FR 25575 , Apr. 27, 1993; 61 FR 31049 , June 19, 1996; 64 FR 22561 , Apr. 27, 1999; 65 FR 44008 , July 17,
2000; 67 FR 45670 , July 10, 2002; 67 FR 48993 , July 29, 2002; 69 FR 2686 ,
Jan. 20, 2004; 70 FR 1373 , Jan. 7, 2005; 70 FR 17329 , Apr. 6, 2005; 71 FR 11540 , Mar. 8, 2006]

§ 15.38 Incorporation by reference.

top

(a) The materials listed in this section are incorporated by reference in
this part. These incorporations by reference were approved by the Director
of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part
51. These materials are incorporated as they exist on the date of the
approval, and notice of any change in these materials will be published in
theFederal Register.The materials are available for purchase at the
corresponding addresses as noted, and all are available for inspection at
the Federal Communications Commission, 445 12th. St., SW., Reference
Information Center, Room CY-A257, Washington, DC 20554, and at the National
Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the
availability of this material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to:
http://www.archives.gov/federal_register/code_of_federal_regulations/ibr_loc
ations.html .

(b) The following materials are available for purchase from at least one of
the following addresses: Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way
East, Englewood, CO 80112 or at http://global.ihs.com; or American National
Standards Institute, 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036 or
at http://webstore.ansi.org/ansidocstore/default.asp; or Society of Cable
Telecommunications Engineers at http://www.scte.org/standards/index.cfm.

(1) SCTE 28 2003 (formerly DVS 295): “Host-POD Interface Standard,” 2003,
IBR approved for §15.123.

(2) SCTE 41 2003 (formerly DVS 301): “POD Copy Protection System,” 2003, IBR
approved for §15.123.

(3) ANSI/SCTE 54 2003 (formerly DVS 241): “Digital Video Service Multiplex
and Transport System Standard for Cable Television,” 2003, IBR approved for
§15.123.

(4) ANSI/SCTE 65 2002 (formerly DVS 234): “Service Information Delivered
Out-of-Band for Digital Cable Television,” 2002, IBR approved for §15.123.

(5) SCTE 40 2003 (formerly DVS 313): “Digital Cable Network Interface
Standard,” 2003, IBR approved for §15.123.

(6) ANSI C63.4–2003: “Methods of Measurement of Radio-Noise Emissions from
Low-Voltage Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the Range of 9 kHz to 40
GHz,” 2003, IBR approved for §15.31, except for sections 4.1, 5.2, 5.7, 9
and 14.

(7) CEA–542–B: “CEA Standard: Cable Television Channel Identification
Plan,” July 2003, IBR approved for §15.118.

(8) EIA–608: “Recommended Practice for Line 21 Data Service,” 1994, IBR
approved for §15.120.

(9) EIA–744: “Transport of Content Advisory Information Using Extended Data
Service (XDS),” 1997, IBR approved for §15.120.

(10) EIA–708–B: “Digital Television (DTV) Closed Captioning,” 1999, IBR
approved for §15.122.

(11) Third Edition of the International Special Committee on Radio
Interference (CISPR), Pub. 22, “Information Technology Equipment—Radio
Disturbance Characteristics—Limits and Methods of Measurement,” 1997, IBR
approved for §15.109.

(12) ANSI C63.17–1998: “Methods of Measurement of the Electromagnetic and
Operational Compatibility of Unlicensed Personal Communications Services
(UPCS) Devices”, 1998, IBR approved for §15.31.

(13) CEA–766–A: “U.S. and Canadian Region Rating Tables (RRT) and Content
Advisory Descriptors for Transport of Content Advisory Information using
ATSC A/65–A Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP),” April 2001, IBR
approved for §15.120.

(c) The following materials are freely available from at least one of the
following addresses: Consumer Electronics Association, 2500 Wilson Blvd.,
Arlington, VA 22201 or at http://www.ce.org/publicpolicy :
Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903: “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance
Checklist: PICS Proforma,” 2003, IBR approved for §15.123.

[ 68 FR 66732 , Nov. 28, 2003, as amended at 68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003; 69 FR 18803 , Apr. 9, 2004; 69 FR 54034 , Sept. 7, 2004; 69 FR 59534 , Oct. 4, 2004;
69 FR 57861 , Sept. 28, 2004]

Subpart B—Unintentional Radiators

top

§ 15.101 Equipment authorization of unintentional radiators.

top

(a) Except as otherwise exempted in §§15.23, 15.103, and 15.113,
unintentional radiators shall be authorized prior to the initiation of
marketing, as follows:
Type of device Equipment authorization required
TV broadcast receiver Verification.
FM broadcast receiver Verification.
CB receiver Declaration of Conformity or Certification.
Superregenerative receiver Declaration of Conformity or Certification.
Scanning receiver Certification.
Radar detector Certification.
All other receivers subject to part 15 Declaration of Conformity or
Certification.
TV interface device Declaration of Conformity or Certification.
Cable system terminal device Declaration of Conformity.
Stand-alone cable input selector switch Verification.
Class B personal computers and peripherals Declaration of Conformity or
Certification.^1
CPU boards and internal power supplies used with Class B personal computers
Declaration of Conformity or Certification.^1
Class B personal computers assembled using authorized CPU boards or power
supplies Declaration of Conformity.
Class B external switching power supplies Verification.
Other Class B digital devices & peripherals Verification.
Class A digital devices, peripherals & external switching power supplies
Verification.
Access Broadband over Power Line (Access BPL) Certification.
All other devices Verification.

(b) Only those receivers that operate (tune) within the frequency range of
30–960 MHz, CB receivers and radar detectors are subject to the
authorizations shown in paragraph (a) of this section. However, receivers
indicated as being subject to Declaration of Conformity that are contained
within a transceiver, the transmitter portion of which is subject to
certification, shall be authorized under the verification procedure.
Receivers operating above 960 MHz or below 30 MHz, except for radar
detectors and CB receivers, are exempt from complying with the technical
provisions of this part but are subject to §15.5.

(1) The specific combination of CPU board, power supply and enclosure is
tested together and authorized under a Declaration of Conformity or a grant
of certification;

(2) The personal computer is authorized under a Declaration of Conformity or
a grant of certification, and the CPU board or power supply in that computer
is replaced with a CPU board or power supply that has been separately
authorized under a Declaration of Conformity or a grant of certification; or

(3) The CPU board and power supply used in the assembly of a personal
computer have been separately authorized under a Declaration of Conformity
or a grant of certification; and

(4) Personal computers assembled using either of the methods specified in
paragraphs (c)(2) or (c)(3) of this section must, by themselves, also be
authorized under a Declaration of Conformity if they are marketed. However,
additional testing is not required for this Declaration of Conformity,
provided the procedures in §15.102(b) are followed.

(d) Peripheral devices, as defined in §15.3(r), shall be authorized under a
Declaration of Conformity, or a grant of certification, or verified, as
appropriate, prior to marketing. Regardless of the provisions of paragraphs
(a) or (c) of this section, if a CPU board, power supply, or peripheral
device will always be marketed with a specific personal computer, it is not
necessary to obtain a separate authorization for that product provided the
specific combination of personal computer, peripheral device, CPU board and
power supply has been authorized under a Declaration of Conformity or a
grant of certification as a personal computer.

(1) No authorization is required for a peripheral device or a subassembly
that is sold to an equipment manufacturer for further fabrication; that
manufacturer is responsible for obtaining the necessary authorization prior
to further marketing to a vendor or to a user.

(2) Power supplies and CPU boards that have not been separately authorized
and are designed for use with personal computers may be imported and
marketed only to a personal computer equipment manufacturer that has
indicated, in writing, to the seller or importer that they will obtain a
Declaration of Conformity or a grant of certification for the personal
computer employing these components.

(e) Subassemblies to digital devices are not subject to the technical
standards in this part unless they are marketed as part of a system in which
case the resulting system must comply with the applicable regulations.
Subassemblies include:

(1) Devices that are enclosed solely within the enclosure housing the
digital device, except for: power supplies used in personal computers;
devices included under the definition of a peripheral device in §15.3(r);
and personal computer CPU boards, as defined in §15.3(bb);

(2) CPU boards, as defined in §15.3(bb), other than those used in personal
computers, that are marketed without an enclosure or power supply; and

(3) Switching power supplies that are separately marketed and are solely for
use internal to a device other than a personal computer.

(f) The procedures for obtaining a grant of certification or notification
and for verification and a Declaration of Conformity are contained in
subpart J of part 2 of this chapter.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 61 FR 31050 , June 19, 1996; 63 FR 36602 , July 7, 1998; 64 FR 4997 , Feb. 2, 1999; 67 FR 48993 , July 29, 2002;
70 FR 1373 , Jan. 7, 2005]

§ 15.102 CPU boards and power supplies used in personal computers.

top

(a) Authorized CPU boards and power supplies that are sold as separate
components shall be supplied with complete installation instructions. These
instructions shall specify all of the installation procedures that must be
followed to ensure compliance with the standards, including, if necessary,
the type of enclosure, e.g., a metal enclosure, proper grounding techniques,
the use of shielded cables, the addition of any needed components, and any
necessary modifications to additional components.

(1) Any additional parts needed to ensure compliance with the standards,
except for the enclosure, are considered to be special accessories and, in
accordance with §15.27, must be marketed with the CPU board or power supply.

(2) Any modifications that must be made to a personal computer, peripheral
device, CPU board or power supply during installation of a CPU board or
power supply must be simple enough that they can be performed by the average
consumer. Parts requiring soldering, disassembly of circuitry or other
similar modifications are not permitted.

(b) Assemblers of personal computer systems employing modular CPU boards
and/or power supplies are not required to test the resulting system provided
the following conditions are met:

(1) Each device used in the system has been authorized as required under
this part (according to §15.101(e), some subassemblies used in a personal
computer system may not require an authorization);

(2) The original label and identification on each piece of equipment remain
unchanged;

(3) Each responsible party's instructions to ensure compliance (including,
if necessary, the use of shielded cables or other accessories or
modifications) are followed when the system is assembled;

(4) If the system is marketed, the resulting equipment combination is
authorized under a Declaration of Conformity pursuant to §15.101(c)(4) and a
compliance information statement, as described in §2.1077(b), is supplied
with the system. Marketed systems shall also comply with the labelling
requirements in §15.19 and must be supplied with the information required
under §§15.21, 15.27 and 15.105; and

(5) The assembler of a personal computer system may be required to test the
system and/or make necessary modifications if a system is found to cause
harmful interference or to be noncompliant with the appropriate standards in
the configuration in which it is marketed (see §§2.909, 15.1, 15.27(d) and
15.101(e)).

[ 61 FR 31050 , June 19, 1996]

§ 15.103 Exempted devices.

top

The following devices are subject only to the general conditions of
operation in §§15.5 and 15.29 and are exempt from the specific technical
standards and other requirements contained in this part. The operator of the
exempted device shall be required to stop operating the device upon a
finding by the Commission or its representative that the device is causing
harmful interference. Operation shall not resume until the condition causing
the harmful interference has been corrected. Although not mandatory, it is
strongly recommended that the manufacturer of an exempted device endeavor to
have the device meet the specific technical standards in this part.

(a) A digital device utilized exclusively in any transportation vehicle
including motor vehicles and aircraft.

(b) A digital device used exclusively as an electronic control or power
system utilized by a public utility or in an industrial plant. The term
public utility includes equipment only to the extent that it is in a
dedicated building or large room owned or leased by the utility and does not
extend to equipment installed in a subscriber's facility.

(d) A digital device utilized exclusively in an appliance, e.g., microwave
oven, dishwasher, clothes dryer, air conditioner (central or window), etc.

(e) Specialized medical digital devices (generally used at the direction of
or under the supervision of a licensed health care practitioner) whether
used in a patient's home or a health care facility. Non-specialized medical
devices, i.e., devices marketed through retail channels for use by the
general public, are not exempted. This exemption also does not apply to
digital devices used for record keeping or any purpose not directly
connected with medical treatment.

(f) Digital devices that have a power consumption not exceeding 6 nW.

(g) Joystick controllers or similar devices, such as a mouse, used with
digital devices but which contain only non-digital circuitry or a simple
circuit to convert the signal to the format required (e.g., an integrated
circuit for analog to digital conversion) are viewed as passive add-on
devices, not themselves directly subject to the technical standards or the
equipment authorization requirements.

(h) Digital devices in which both the highest frequency generated and the
highest frequency used are less than 1.705 MHz and which do not operate from
the AC power lines or contain provisions for operation while connected to
the AC power lines. Digital devices that include, or make provision for the
use of, battery eliminators, AC adaptors or battery chargers which permit
operation while charging or that connect to the AC power lines indirectly,
obtaining their power through another device which is connected to the AC
power lines, do not fall under this exemption.

(i) Responsible parties should note that equipment containing more than one
device is not exempt from the technical standards in this part unless all of
the devices in the equipment meet the criteria for exemption. If only one of
the included devices qualifies for exemption, the remainder of the equipment
must comply with any applicable regulations. If a device performs more than
one function and all of those functions do not meet the criteria for
exemption, the device does not qualify for inclusion under the exemptions.

§ 15.105 Information to the user.

top

(a) For a Class A digital device or peripheral, the instructions furnished
the user shall include the following or similar statement, placed in a
prominent location in the text of the manual:

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

(b) For a Class B digital device or peripheral, the instructions furnished
the user shall include the following or similar statement, placed in a
prominent location in the text of the manual:

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

—Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

(c) The provisions of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to
digital devices exempted from the technical standards under the provisions
of §15.103.

(d) For systems incorporating several digital devices, the statement shown
in paragraph (a) or (b) of this section needs to be contained only in the
instruction manual for the main control unit.

(e) In cases where the manual is provided only in a form other than paper,
such as on a computer disk or over the Internet, the information required by
this section may be included in the manual in that alternative form,
provided the user can reasonably be expected to have the capability to
access information in that form.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.107 Conducted limits.

top

(a) Except for Class A digital devices, for equipment that is designed to be
connected to the public utility (AC) power line, the radio frequency voltage
that is conducted back onto the AC power line on any frequency or
frequencies within the band 150 kHz to 30 MHz shall not exceed the limits in
the following table, as measured using a 50 μH/50 ohms line impedance
stabilization network (LISN). Compliance with the provisions of this
paragraph shall be based on the measurement of the radio frequency voltage
between each power line and ground at the power terminal. The lower limit
applies at the band edges.
Frequency of emission (MHz) Conducted limit (dBμV)
Quasi-peak Average
0.15–0.5 66 to 56* 56 to 46*
0.5–5 56 46
5–30 60 50

*Decreases with the logarithm of the frequency.

(b) For a Class A digital device that is designed to be connected to the
public utility (AC) power line, the radio frequency voltage that is
conducted back onto the AC power line on any frequency or frequencies within
the band 150 kHz to 30 MHz shall not exceed the limits in the following
table, as measured using a 50 μH/50 ohms LISN. Compliance with the
provisions of this paragraph shall be based on the measurement of the radio
frequency voltage between each power line and ground at the power terminal.
The lower limit applies at the boundary between the frequency ranges.
Frequency of emission (MHz) Conducted limit (dBμV)
Quasi-peak Average
0.15–0.5 79 66
0.5–30 73 60

(c) The limits shown in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section shall not
apply to carrier current systems operating as unintentional radiators on
frequencies below 30 MHz. In lieu thereof, these carrier current systems
shall be subject to the following standards:

(1) For carrier current systems containing their fundamental emission within
the frequency band 535–1705 kHz and intended to be received using a standard
AM broadcast receiver: no limit on conducted emissions.

(2) For all other carrier current systems: 1000 μV within the frequency band
535–1705 kHz, as measured using a 50 μH/50 ohms LISN.

(3) Carrier current systems operating below 30 MHz are also subject to the
radiated emission limits in §15.109(e).

(d) Measurements to demonstrate compliance with the conducted limits are not
required for devices which only employ battery power for operation and which
do not operate from the AC power lines or contain provisions for operation
while connected to the AC power lines. Devices that include, or make
provision for, the use of battery chargers which permit operating while
charging, AC adaptors or battery eliminators or that connect to the AC power
lines indirectly, obtaining their power through another device which is
connected to the AC power lines, shall be tested to demonstrate compliance
with the conducted limits.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992; 58 FR 51249 , Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 19098 , Apr. 13, 2001; 67 FR 45670 , July 10, 2002]

§ 15.109 Radiated emission limits.

top

(a) Except for Class A digital devices, the field strength of radiated
emissions from unintentional radiators at a distance of 3 meters shall not
exceed the following values:
Frequency of emission (MHz) Field strength (microvolts/meter)
30–88 100
88–216 150
216–960 200
Above 960 500

(b) The field strength of radiated emissions from a Class A digital device,
as determined at a distance of 10 meters, shall not exceed the following:
Frequency of emission (MHz) Field strength (microvolts/meter)
30–88 90
88–216 150
216–960 210
Above 960 300

(c) In the emission tables above, the tighter limit applies at the band
edges. Sections 15.33 and 15.35 which specify the frequency range over which
radiated emissions are to be measured and the detector functions and other
measurement standards apply.

(d) For CB receivers, the field strength of radiated emissions within the
frequency range of 25–30 MHz shall not exceed 40 microvolts/meter at a
distance of 3 meters. The field strength of radiated emissions above 30 MHz
from such devices shall comply with the limits in paragraph (a) of this
section.

(e) Carrier current systems used as unintentional radiators or other
unintentional radiators that are designed to conduct their radio frequency
emissions via connecting wires or cables and that operate in the frequency
range of 9 kHz to 30 MHz, including devices that deliver the radio frequency
energy to transducers, such as ultrasonic devices not covered under part 18
of this chapter, shall comply with the radiated emission limits for
intentional radiators provided in §15.209 for the frequency range of 9 kHz
to 30 MHz. As an alternative, carrier current systems used as unintentional
radiators and operating in the frequency range of 525 kHz to 1705 kHz may
comply with the radiated emission limits provided in §15.221(a). At
frequencies above 30 MHz, the limits in paragraph (a), (b), or (g) of this
section, as appropriate, apply.

(f) For a receiver which employs terminals for the connection of an external
receiving antenna, the receiver shall be tested to demonstrate compliance
with the provisions of this section with an antenna connected to the antenna
terminals unless the antenna conducted power is measured as specified in
§15.111(a). If a permanently attached receiving antenna is used, the
receiver shall be tested to demonstrate compliance with the provisions of
this section.

(g) As an alternative to the radiated emission limits shown in paragraphs
(a) and (b) of this section, digital devices may be shown to comply with the
standards contained in Third Edition of the International Special Committee
on Radio Interference (CISPR), Pub. 22, “Information Technology
Equipment—Radio Disturbance Characteristics—Limits and Methods of
Measurement” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38). In addition:

(1) The test procedure and other requirements specified in this part shall
continue to apply to digital devices.

(2) If, in accordance with §15.33 of this part, measurements must be
performed above 1000 MHz, compliance above 1000 MHz shall be demonstrated
with the emission limit in paragraph (a) or (b) of this section, as
appropriate. Measurements above 1000 MHz may be performed at the distance
specified in the CISPR 22 publications for measurements below 1000 MHz
provided the limits in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section are
extrapolated to the new measurement distance using an inverse linear
distance extrapolation factor (20 dB/decade), e.g., the radiated limit above
1000 MHz for a Class B digital device is 150 uV/m, as measured at a distance
of 10 meters.

(3) The measurement distances shown in CISPR Pub. 22, including measurements
made in accordance with this paragraph above 1000 MHz, are considered, for
the purpose of §15.31(f)(4) of this part, to be the measurement distances
specified in this part.

(4) If the radiated emissions are measured to demonstrate compliance with
the alternative standards in this paragraph, compliance must also be
demonstrated with the conducted limits shown in §15.107(e).

(h) Radar detectors shall comply with the emission limits in paragraph (a)
of this section over the frequency range of 11.7–12.2 GHz.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 56 FR 373 , Jan. 4, 1991; 58 FR 51249 , Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 19098 , Apr. 13, 2001; 67 FR 48993 , July 29, 2002;
69 FR 2849 , Jan. 21, 2004]

§ 15.111 Antenna power conduction limits for receivers.

top

(a) In addition to the radiated emission limits, receivers that operate
(tune) in the frequency range 30 to 960 MHz and CB receivers that provide
terminals for the connection of an external receiving antenna may be tested
to demonstrate compliance with the provisions of §15.109 with the antenna
terminals shielded and terminated with a resistive termination equal to the
impedance specified for the antenna, provided these receivers also comply
with the following: With the receiver antenna terminal connected to a
resistive termination equal to the impedance specified or employed for the
antenna, the power at the antenna terminal at any frequency within the range
of measurements specified in §15.33 shall not exceed 2.0 nanowatts.

(b) CB receivers and receivers that operate (tune) in the frequency range 30
to 960 MHz that are provided only with a permanently attached antenna shall
comply with the radiated emission limitations in this part, as measured with
the antenna attached.

§ 15.113 Power line carrier systems.

top

Power line carrier systems, as defined in §15.3(t), are subject only to the
following requirements:

(a) A power utility operating a power line carrier system shall submit the
details of all existing systems plus any proposed new systems or changes to
existing systems to an industry-operated entity as set forth in §90.63(g) of
this chapter. No notification to the FCC is required.

(b) The operating parameters of a power line carrier system (particularly
the frequency) shall be selected to achieve the highest practical degree of
compatibility with authorized or licensed users of the radio spectrum. The
signals from this operation shall be contained within the frequency band 9
kHz to 490 kHz. A power line carrier system shall operate on an unprotected,
non-interference basis in accordance with §15.5 of this part. If harmful
interference occurs, the electric power utility shall discontinue use or
adjust its power line carrier operation, as required, to remedy the
interference. Particular attention should be paid to the possibility of
interference to Loran C operations at 100 kHz.

(c) Power line carrier system apparatus shall be operated with the minimum
power possible to accomplish the desired purpose. No equipment authorization
is required.

(d) The best engineering principles shall be used in the generation of radio
frequency currents by power line carrier systems to guard against harmful
interference to authorized radio users, particularly on the fundamental and
harmonic frequencies.

(e) Power line carrier system apparatus shall conform to such engineering
standards as may be promulgated by the Commission. In addition, such systems
should adhere to industry approved standards designed to enhance the use of
power line carrier systems.

(f) The provisions of this section apply only to systems operated by a power
utility for general supervision of the power system and do not permit
operation on electric lines which connect the distribution substation to the
customer or house wiring. Such operation can be conducted under the other
provisions of this part.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989; 54 FR 32339 , Aug. 7, 1989]

§ 15.115 TV interface devices, including cable system terminal devices.

top

(a) Measurements of the radiated emissions of a TV interface device shall be
conducted with the output terminal(s) of the device terminated by a
resistance equal to the rated output impedance. The emanations of a TV
interface device incorporating an intentional radiator shall not exceed the
limits in §15.109 or subpart C of this part, whichever is higher for each
frequency. Where it is possible to determine which portion of the device is
contributing a particular radio frequency emission, the emissions from the
TV interface device portion shall comply with the emission limits in
§15.109, and the emissions from the intentional radiator shall comply with
subpart C of this part.

(b) Output signal limits:

(1) At any RF output terminal, the maximum measured RMS voltage, in
microvolts, corresponding to the peak envelope power of the modulated signal
during maximum amplitude peaks across a resistance (R in ohms) matching the
rated output impedance of the TV interface device, shall not exceed the
following:

(i) For a cable system terminal device or a TV interface device used with a
master antenna, 692.8 times the square root of (R) for the video signal and
155 times the square root of (R) for the audio signal.

(ii) For all other TV interface devices, 346.4 times the square root of (R)
for the video signal and 77.5 times the square root of (R) for the audio
signal.

(2) At any RF output terminal, the maximum measured RMS voltage, in
microvolts, corresponding to the peak envelope power of the modulated signal
during maximum amplitude peaks across a resistance (R in ohms) matching the
rated output impedance of the TV interface device, of any emission appearing
on frequencies removed by more than 4.6 MHz below or 7.4 MHz above the video
carrier frequency on which the TV interface device is operated shall not
exceed the following:

(i) For a cable system terminal device or a TV interface device used with a
master antenna, 692.8 times the square root of (R).

(ii) For all other TV interface devices, 10.95 times the square root of (R).

(3) The term master antenna used in this section refers to TV interface
devices employed for central distribution of television or other video
signals within a building. Such TV interface devices must be designed to:

(i) Distribute multiple television signals at the same time;

(ii) Distribute such signals by cable to outlets or TV receivers in multiple
rooms in the building in which the TV interface devices are installed; and,

(iii) Distribute all over-the-air or cable signals.

Note: Cable-ready video cassette recorders continue to be subject to the
provisions for general TV interface devices.

(c) A TV interface device shall be equipped with a transfer switch for
connecting the antenna terminals of a receiver selectively either to the
receiving antenna or to the radio frequency output of the TV interface
device, subject to the following:

(1) When measured in any of its set positions, transfer switches shall
comply with the following requirements:

(i) For a cable system terminal device or a TV interface device equipped for
use with a cable system or a master antenna, as defined in paragraph (b)(3)
of this section, the isolation between the antenna and cable input terminals
shall be at least 80 dB from 54 MHz to 216 MHz, at least 60 dB from 216 MHz
to 550 MHz and at least 55 dB from 550 MHz to 806 MHz. The 80 dB standard
applies at 216 MHz and the 60 dB standard applies at 550 MHz. In the case of
a transfer switch requiring a power source, the required isolation shall be
maintained in the event the device is not connected to a power source or
power is interrupted. The provisions of this paragraph regarding frequencies
in the range 550 MHz to 806 MHz are applicable as of June 30, 1997.

(ii) For all other TV interface devices, the maximum voltage, corresponding
to the peak envelope power of the modulated video signal during maximum
amplitude peaks, in microvolts, appearing at the receiving antenna input
terminals when terminated with a resistance (R in ohms) matching the rated
impedance of the antenna input of the switch, shall not exceed 0.346 times
the square root of (R).

(iii) Measurement to determine compliance with the transfer switch limits
shall be made using a connecting cable, where required, between the TV
interface device and the transfer switch of the type and length:

(A) Provided with the TV interface device,

(B) Recommended in the instruction manual, or

(2) A TV interface device shall be designed and constructed, to the extent
practicable, so as to preclude the possibility that the consumer may
inadvertently attach the output of the device to the receiving antenna, if
any, without first going through the transfer switch.

(3) A transfer switch is not required for a TV interface device that, when
connected, results in the user no longer having any need to receive standard
over-the-air broadcast signals via a separate antenna. A transfer switch is
not required to be marketed with a cable system terminal device unless that
device provides for the connection of an external antenna. A transfer switch
is not required for a device that is intended to be used as an accessory to
an authorized TV interface device.

(4) An actual transfer switch is not required for a TV interface device,
including a cable system terminal device, that has an antenna input
terminal(s); provided, the circuitry following the antenna input terminal(s)
has sufficient bandwidth to allow the reception of all TV broadcast channels
authorized under part 73 of this chapter and: For a cable system terminal
device that can alternate between the reception of cable television service
and an antenna, compliance with the isolation requirement specified in
paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section can be demonstrated; and, for all other
TV interface devices, the maximum voltage appearing at the antenna
terminal(s) does not exceed the limit in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this
section.

(5) If a transfer switch is not required, the following label shall be used
in addition to the label shown in §15.19(a):

This device is intended to be attached to a receiver that is not used to
receive over-the-air broadcast signals. Connection of this device in any
other fashion may cause harmful interference to radio communications and is
in violation of the FCC Rules, part 15.

(d) A TV interface device, including a cable system terminal device, shall
incorporate circuitry to automatically prevent emanations from the device
from exceeding the technical specifications in this part. These circuits
shall be adequate to accomplish their functions when the TV interface device
is presented, if applicable, with video input signal levels in the range of
one to five volts; this requirement is not applicable to a TV interface
device that uses a built-in signal source and has no provisions for the
connection of an external signal source. For devices that contain provisions
for an external signal source but do not contain provisions for the input of
an external baseband signal, e.g., some cable system terminal devices,
compliance with the provisions of this paragraph shall be demonstrated with
a radio frequency input signal of 0 to 25 dBmV.

(e) For cable system terminal devices and TV interface devices used with a
master antenna, as defined in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, the holder
of the grant of authorization shall specify in the instruction manual or
pamphlet, if a manual is not provided, the types of wires or coaxial cables
necessary to ensure that the unit complies with the requirements of this
part. The holder of the grant of authorization must comply with the
provisions of §15.27. For all other TV interface devices, the wires or
coaxial cables used to couple the output signals to the TV receiver shall be
provided by the responsible party.

(f) A TV interface device which is submitted to the Commission as a
composite device in a single enclosure containing a RF modulator, video
source and other component devices shall be submitted on a single
application (FCC Form 731) and shall be authorized as a single device.

(g) An external device or accessory that is intended to be attached to a TV
interface device shall comply with the technical and administrative
requirements set out in the rules under which it operates. For example, a
personal computer must be certificated to show compliance with the
regulations for digital devices.

(h) Stand-alone switches used to alternate between cable service and an
antenna shall provide isolation between the antenna and cable input
terminals that is at least 80 dB from 54 MHz to 216 MHz, at least 60 dB from
216 MHz to 550 MHz and at least 55 dB from 550 MHz to 806 MHz. The 80 dB
standard applies at 216 MHz and the 60 dB standard applies at 550 MHz. In
the case of stand-alone switches requiring a power source, the required
isolation shall be maintained in the event the device is not connected to a
power source or power is interrupted. The provisions of this paragraph are
applicable as of June 30, 1997.

(i) Switches and other devices intended to be used to by-pass the processing
circuitry of a cable system terminal device, whether internal to such a
terminal device or a stand-alone unit, shall not attenuate the input signal
more than 6 dB from 54 MHz to 550 MHz, or more than 8 dB from 550 MHz to 804
MHz. The 6 dB standard applies at 550 MHz. The provisions of this paragraph
are applicable June 30, 1997.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992; 59 FR 25341 , May 16, 1994; 61 FR 18509 , Apr. 26, 1996]

§ 15.117 TV broadcast receivers.

top

(a) All TV broadcast receivers shipped in interstate commerce or imported
into the United States, for sale or resale to the public, shall comply with
the provisions of this section, except that paragraphs (f) and (g) of this
section shall not apply to the features of such sets that provide for
reception of digital television signals. The reference in this section to TV
broadcast receivers also includes devices, such as TV interface devices and
set-top devices that are intended to provide audio-video signals to a video
monitor, that incorporate the tuner portion of a TV broadcast receiver and
that are equipped with an antenna or antenna terminals that can be used for
off-the-air reception of TV broadcast signals, as authorized under part 73
of this chapter.

(b) TV broadcast receivers shall be capable of adequately receiving all
channels allocated by the Commission to the television broadcast service.

(c) On a given receiver, use of the UHF and VHF tuning systems shall provide
approximately the same degree of tuning accuracy with approximately the same
expenditure of time and effort: Provided, however, That this requirement
will be considered to be met if the need for routine fine tuning is
eliminated on UHF channels.

(1) Basic tuning mechanism. If a TV broadcast receiver is equipped to
provide for repeated access to VHF television channels at discrete tuning
positions, that receiver shall be equipped to provide for repeated access to
a minimum of six UHF television channels at discrete tuning positions.
Unless a discrete tuning position is provided for each channel allocated to
UHF television, each position shall be readily adjustable to a particular
UHF channel by the user without the use of tools. If 12 or fewer discrete
tuning positions are provided, each position shall be adjustable to receive
any channel allocated to UHF television.

Note: The combination of detented rotary switch and pushbutton controls is
acceptable, provided UHF channels, after their initial selection, can be
accurately tuned with an expenditure of time and effort approximately the
same as that used in accurately tuning VHF channels. A UHF tuning system
comprising five pushbuttons and a separate manual tuning knob is considered
to provide repeated access to six channels at discrete tuning positions. A
one-knob (VHF/UHF) tuning system providing repeated access to 11 or more
discrete tuning positions is also acceptable, provided each of the tuning
positions is readily adjustable, without the use of tools, to receive any
UHF channel.

(2) Tuning controls and channel readout. UHF tuning controls and channel
readout on a given receiver shall be comparable in size, location,
accessibility and legibility to VHF controls and readout on that receiver.

Note: Differences between UHF and VHF channel readout that follow directly
from the larger number of UHF television channels available are acceptable
if it is clear that a good faith effort to comply with the provisions of
this section has been made.

(d) If equipment and controls that tend to simplify, expedite or perfect the
reception of television signals (e.g., AFC, visual aids, remote control, or
signal seeking capability referred to generally as tuning aids) are
incorporated into the VHF portion of a TV broadcast receiver, tuning aids of
the same type and comparable capability and quality shall be provided for
the UHF portion of that receiver.

(e) If a television receiver has an antenna affixed to the VHF antenna
terminals, it must have an antenna designed for and capable of receiving all
UHF television channels affixed to the UHF antenna terminals. If a VHF
antenna is provided with but not affixed to a receiver, a UHF antenna shall
be provided with the receiver.

(f) The picture sensitivity of a TV broadcast receiver averaged for all
channels between 14 and 69 inclusive shall not be more than 8dB larger than
the peak picture sensitivity of that receiver averaged for all channels
between 2 and 13 inclusive.

(g) The noise figure for any television channel 14 to 69 inclusive shall not
exceed 14 dB. A TV receiver model is considered to comply with this noise
figure if the maximum noise figure for channels 14–69 inclusive of 97.5% of
all receivers within that model does not exceed 14 dB.

(1) The responsible party shall measure the noise figure of a number of UHF
channels of the test sample to give reasonable assurance that the UHF noise
figure for each channel complies with the above limit.

(2) The responsible party shall insert in his files a statement explaining
the basis on which it will rely to ensure that at least 97.5% of all
production units of the test sample that are manufactured have a noise
figure of no greater than 14 dB.

(3) [Reserved]

(4) In the case of a TV tuner built-in as part of a video tape recorder that
uses a power splitter between the antenna terminals of the video tape
recorder and the input terminals of the TV tuner or a TV broadcast receiver
that uses a power splitter between the antenna terminals of two or more UHF
tuners contained within that receiver, 4 dB may be subtracted from the noise
figure measured at the antenna terminals of the video tape recorder or TV
broadcast receiver for determining compliance of the UHF tuner(s) with the
14 dB noise figure limit.

(h) Digital television reception capability. TV broadcast receivers are
required only to provide useable picture and sound commensurate with their
video and audio capabilities when receiving digital television signals.

(i) Digital television reception capability implementation schedule. (1)
Responsible parties, as defined in §2.909 of this chapter, are required to
equip new TV broadcast receivers that are shipped in interstate commerce or
imported from any foreign country into the United States and for which they
are responsible to comply with the provisions of this section in accordance
with the following schedule:

(i) Receivers with screen sizes 36&inch; and above—50% of all of a
responsible party's units must include DTV tuners effective July 1, 2004;
100% of such units must include DTV tuners effective July 1, 2005.

(ii) Receivers with screen sizes 25&inch; to less than 36&inch;—50% of all
of a responsible party's units must include DTV tuners effective July 1,
2005; 100% of such units must include DTV tuners effective March 1, 2006.

(iii) Receivers with screen sizes less than 25"—100% of all such units must
include DTV tuners effective March 1, 2007.

(iv) Other video devices (videocassette recorders (VCRs), digital video
recorders such as hard drive and DVD recorders, etc.) that receive
television signals—100% of all such units must include DTV tuners effective
March 1, 2007.

(2) For purposes of this implementation schedule, screen sizes are to be
measured diagonally across the picture viewing area. The requirement for
equipping new TV broadcast receivers with DTV reception capability does not
apply to units with integrated tuners/displays that have screen sizes
measuring less than 7.8 inches vertically, i.e., the vertical measurement of
a screen in the 4:3 aspect ratio that measures 13' diagonally across the
picture viewing area.

(3) Responsible parties may include combinations of DTV monitors and set-top
DTV tuners in meeting the required percentages of units with a DTV tuner if
such combinations are marketed together with a single price.

(4) The requirement to include digital television reception capability in
new TV broadcast receivers does not apply to devices such as mobile
telephones and personal digital assistants where such devices do not include
the capability to receive TV service on the frequencies allocated for
broadcast television service.

(j) For a TV broadcast receiver equipped with a cable input selector switch,
the selector switch shall provide, in any of its set positions, isolation
between the antenna and cable input terminals of at least 80 dB from 54 MHz
to 216 MHz, at least 60 dB from 216 MHz to 550 MHz and at least 55 dB from
550 MHz to 806 MHz. The 80 dB standard applies at 216 MHz and the 60 dB
standard applies at 550 MHz. In the case of a selector switch requiring a
power source, the required isolation shall be maintained in the event the
device is not connected to a power source or power is interrupted. An actual
switch that can alternate between reception of cable television service and
an antenna is not required for a TV broadcast receiver, provided compliance
with the isolation requirement specified in this paragraph can be
demonstrated and the circuitry following the antenna input terminal(s) has
sufficient band-width to allow the reception of all TV broadcast channels
authorized under this chapter. The provisions of this paragraph regarding
frequencies in the range 550 MHz to 806 MHz are applicable as of June 30,
1997.

(k) The following requirements apply to all responsible parties, as defined
in §2.909 of this chapter, and any person that displays or offers for sale
or rent television receiving equipment that is not capable of receiving,
decoding and tuning digital signals.

(1) Such parties and persons shall place conspicuously and in close
proximity to such television broadcast receivers a sign containing, in clear
and conspicuous print, the Consumer Alert disclosure text required by
paragraph (k)(3) of this section. The text should be in a size of type large
enough to be clear, conspicuous and readily legible, consistent with the
dimensions of the equipment and the label. The information may be printed on
a transparent material and affixed to the screen, if the receiver includes a
display, in a manner that is removable by the consumer and does not obscure
the picture, or, if the receiver does not include a display, in a prominent
location on the device, such as on the top or front of the device, when
displayed for sale, or the information in this format may be displayed
separately immediately adjacent to each television broadcast receiver
offered for sale and clearly associated with the analog-only model to which
it pertains.

(2) If such parties and persons display or offer for sale or rent such
television broadcast receivers via direct mail, catalog, or electronic
means, they shall prominently display in close proximity to the images or
descriptions of such television broadcast receivers, in clear and
conspicuous print, the Consumer Alert disclosure text required by paragraph
(k)(3) of this section. The text should be in a size large enough to be
clear, conspicuous, and readily legible, consistent with the dimensions of
the advertisement or description.

(3) Consumer alert. This television receiver has only an analog broadcast
tuner and will require a converter box after February 17, 2009, to receive
over-the-air broadcasts with an antenna because of the Nation's transition
to digital broadcasting. Analog-only TVs should continue to work as before
with cable and satellite TV services, gaming consoles, VCRs, DVD players,
and similar products. For more information, call the Federal Communications
Commission at 1–888–225–5322 (TTY: 1–888–835–5322) or visit the Commission's
digital television Web site at: http://www.dtv.gov.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 25341 , May 16, 1994; 61 FR 30532 , June 17, 1996; 67 FR 63294 , Oct. 11, 2002; 70 FR 38804 , July 6, 2005;
70 FR 75743 , Dec. 21, 2005; 72 FR 26560 , May 10, 2007]

§ 15.118 Cable ready consumer electronics equipment.

top

(a) All consumer electronics TV receiving equipment marketed in the United
States as cable ready or cable compatible shall comply with the provisions
of this section. Consumer electronics TV receiving equipment that includes
features intended for use with cable service but does not fully comply with
the provisions of this section are subject to the labelling requirements of
§15.19(d). Until such time as generally accepted testing standards are
developed, paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section will apply only to the
analog portion of covered consumer electronics TV receiving equipment

(b) Cable ready consumer electronics equipment shall be capable of receiving
all NTSC or similar video channels on channels 1 through 125 of the channel
allocation plan set forth in CEA–542–B: “CEA Standard: Cable Television
Channel Identification Plan,” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38).

(c) Cable ready consumer electronics equipment must meet the following
technical performance requirements. Compliance with these requirements shall
be determined by performing measurements at the unfiltered IF output port.
Where appropriate, the Commission will consider allowing alternative
measurement methods.

(1) Adjacent channel interference. In the presence of a lower adjacent
channel CW signal that is 1.5 MHz below the desired visual carrier in
frequency and 10 dB below the desired visual carrier in amplitude, spurious
signals within the IF passband shall be attenuated at least 55 dB below the
visual carrier of the desired signal. The desired input signal shall be an
NTSC visual carrier modulated with a 10 IRE flat field with color burst and
the aural carrier which is 10 dB below the visual carrier should be
unmodulated. Measurements are to be performed for input signal levels of 0
dBmV and +15 dBmV, with the receiver tuned to ten evenly spaced EIA IS–132
channels covering the band 54 MHz to 804 MHz.

(2) Image channel interference. Image channel interference within the IF
passband shall be attenuated below the visual carrier of the desired channel
by at least 60 dB from 54 MHz to 714 MHz and 50 dB from 714 MHz to 804 MHz.
The 60 dB standard applies at 714 MHz. In testing for compliance with this
standard, the desired input signal is to be an NTSC signal on which the
visual carrier is modulated with a 10 IRE flat field with color burst and
the aural carrier is unmodulated and 10 dB below the visual carrier. The
undesired test signal shall be a CW signal equal in amplitude to the desired
visual carrier and located 90 MHz above the visual carrier frequency of the
desired channel. Measurements shall be performed for input signals of 0 dBmV
and +15 dBmV, with the receiver tuned to at least ten evenly spaced EIA
IS–132 channels covering the band 54 MHz to 804 MHz.

(3) Direct pickup interference. The direct pickup (DPU) of a co-channel
interfering ambient field by a cable ready device shall not exceed the
following criteria. The ratio of the desired to undesired signal levels at
the IF passband on each channel shall be at least 45 dB. The average ratio
over the six channels shall be at least 50 dB. The desired input signal
shall be an NTSC signal having a visual carrier level of 0 dBmV. The visual
carrier is modulated with a 10 IRE flat field with color burst, visual to
aural carrier ratio of 10 dB, aural carrier unmodulated. The equipment under
test (EUT) shall be placed on a rotatable table that is one meter in height.
Any excess length of the power cord and other connecting leads shall be
coiled on the floor under the table. The EUT shall be immersed in a
horizontally polarized uniform CW field of 100 mV/m at a frequency 2.55 MHz
above the visual carrier of the EUT tuned channel. Measurements shall be
made with the EUT tuned to six EIA IS–132 channels, two each in the low VHF,
high VHF and UHF broadcast bands. On each channel, the levels at the IF
passband due to the desired and interfering signals are to be measured.

(4) Tuner overload. Spurious signals within the IF passband shall be
attenuated at least 55 dB below the visual carrier of the desired channel
using a comb-like spectrum input with each visual carrier signal
individually set at +15 dBmV from 54 to 550 MHz. The desired input signal is
to be an NTSC signal on which the visual carrier is modulated with a 10 IRE
flat field with color burst and the aural carrier is unmodulated and 10 dB
below the visual carrier. Measurements shall be made with the receiver tuned
to at least seven evenly spaced EIA IS–132 channels covering the band 54 MHz
to 550 MHz. In addition, spurious signals within the IF passband shall be
attenuated at least 51 dB below the visual carrier of the desired channel
using a comb spectrum input with each signal individually set at +15 dBmV
from 550 to 804 MHz. Measurements shall be made with the receiver tuned to
at least three evenly spaced EIA IS–132 channels covering the band 550 MHz
to 804 MHz.

(5) Cable input conducted emissions. (i) Conducted spurious emissions that
appear at the cable input to the device must meet the following criteria.
The input shall be an NTSC video carrier modulated with a 10 IRE flat field
with color burst at a level of 0 dBmV and with a visual to aural ratio of 10
dB. The aural carrier shall be unmodulated. The peak level of the spurious
signals will be measured using a spectrum analyzer connected by a
directional coupler to the cable input of the equipment under test. Spurious
signal levels must not exceed the limits in the following table:

From 54 MHz up to and including 300 MHz–26 dBmV

From 300 MHz up to and including 450 MHz–20 dBmV

From 450 MHz up to and including 804 MHz-15 dBmV

(ii) The average of the measurements on multiple channels from 450 MHz up to
and including 804 MHz shall be no greater than -20 dBmV. Measurements shall
be made with the receiver tuned to at least four EIA IS–132 channels in each
of the above bands. The test channels are to be evenly distributed across
each of the bands. Measurements for conducted emissions caused by sources
internal to the device are to be made in a shielded room. Measurements for
conducted emissions caused by external signal sources shall be made in an
ambient RF field whose field strength is 100 mV/m, following the same test
conditions as described in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.

(d) The field strength of radiated emissions from cable ready consumer
electronics equipment shall not exceed the limits in §15.109(a) when
measured in accordance with the applicable procedures specified in §§15.31
and 15.35 for unintentional radiators, with the following modifications.
During testing the NTSC input signal level is to be +15 dBmV, with a visual
to aural ratio of 10 dB. The visual carrier is to be modulated by a 10 IRE
flat field with color burst; the aural carrier is to be unmodulated.
Measurements are to be taken on six EIA IS–132 channels evenly spaced across
the required RF input range of the equipment under test.

Note: The provisions of paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section are
applicable as of June 30, 1997.

[ 59 FR 25341 , May 16, 1994, as amended at 61 FR 18509 , Apr. 26, 1996; 65 FR 64391 , Oct. 27, 2000; 68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003; 69 FR 2849 , Jan. 21, 2004;
69 FR 57861 , Sept. 28, 2004]

§ 15.119 Closed caption decoder requirements for analog television receivers.

top

(a) Effective July 1, 1993, all TV broadcast receivers with picture screens
33 cm (13 in) or larger in diameter shipped in interstate commerce,
manufactured, assembled, or imported from any foreign country into the
United States shall comply with the provisions of this section.

Note: This paragraph places no restriction on the shipping or sale of
television receivers that were manufactured before July 1, 1993.

(b) Transmission format. Closed-caption information is transmitted on line
21 of field 1 of the vertical blanking interval of television signals, in
accordance with §73.682(a)(22) of this chapter.

(c) Operating modes. The television receiver will employ customer-selectable
modes of operation for TV and Caption. A third mode of operation, Text, may
be included on an optional basis. The Caption and Text Modes may contain
data in either of two operating channels, referred to in this document as C1
and C2. The television receiver must decode both C1 and C2 captioning, and
must display the captioning for whichever channel the user selects. The TV
Mode of operation allows the video to be viewed in its original form. The
Caption and Text Modes define one or more areas (called “boxes”) on the
screen within which caption or text characters are displayed.

Note: For more information regarding Text mode, see “Television Captioning
for the Deaf: Signal and Display Specifications”, Engineering Report No.
E–7709–C, Public Broadcasting Service, dated May 1980, and “TeleCaption II
Decoder Module Performance Specification”, National Captioning Institute,
Inc., dated November 1985. These documents are available, respectively, from
the Public Broadcasting Service, 1320 Braddock Place, Alexandria, VA 22314
and from the National Captioning Institute, Inc., 5203 Leesburg Pike, Falls
Church, VA 22041.

(d) Screen format. The display area for captioning and text shall fall
approximately within the safe caption area as defined in paragraph (n)(12)
of this section. This display area will be further divided into 15 character
rows of equal height and 32 columns of equal width, to provide accurate
placement of text on the screen. Vertically, the display area begins on line
43 and is 195 lines high, ending on line 237 on an interlaced display. All
captioning and text shall fall within these established columns and rows.
The characters must be displayed clearly separated from the video over which
they are placed. In addition, the user must have the capability to select a
black background over which the captioned letters are displaced.

(1) Caption mode. In the Caption Mode, text can appear on up to 4 rows
simultaneously anywhere on the screen within the defined display area. In
addition, a solid space equal to one column width may be placed before the
first character and after the last character of each row to enhance
legibility. The caption area will be transparent anywhere that either:

(i) No standard space character or other character has been addressed and no
accompanying solid space is needed; or,

(ii) An accompanying solid space is used and a “transparent space” special
character has been addressed which does not immediately precede or follow a
displayed character.

(2) [Reserved]

(e) Presentation format. In analyzing the presentation of characters, it is
convenient to think in terms of a non-visible cursor which marks the screen
position at which the next event in a given mode and data channel will
occur. The receiver remembers the cursor position for each mode even when
data are received for a different address in an alternate mode or data
channel.

(1) Screen addressing. Two kinds of control codes are used to move the
cursor to specific screen locations. In Caption Mode, these addressing codes
will affect both row and column positioning. In Text Mode, the codes affect
only column positioning. In both modes, the addressing codes are optional.
Default positions are defined for each mode and style when no addressing
code is provided.

(i) The first type of addressing code is the Preamble Address Code (PAC). It
assigns a row number and one of eight “indent” figures. Each successive
indent moves the cursor four columns to the right (starting from the left
margin). Thus, an indent of 0 places the cursor at Column 1, an indent of 4
sets it at Column 5, etc. The PAC indent is non-destructive to displayable
characters. It will not affect the display to the left of the new cursor
position on the indicated row. Note that Preamble Address Codes also set
initial attributes for the displayable characters which follow. See
paragraph (h) of this section and the Preamble Address Code table.

(ii) The second type of addressing code is the Tab Offset, which is one of
three Miscellaneous Control Codes. Tab Offset will move the cursor one, two,
or three columns to the right. The character cells skipped over will be
unaffected; displayable characters in these cells, if any, will remain
intact while empty cells will remain empty, in the same manner that a PAC
indent is non-destructive.

(2) [Reserved]

(f) Caption Mode. There are three styles of presenting text in Caption Mode:
roll-up, pop-on, and paint-on. Character display varies significantly with
the style used, but certain rules of character erasure are common to all
styles. A character can be erased by addressing another character to the
same screen location or by backspacing over the character from a subsequent
location on the same row. The entire displayed memory will be erased
instantly by receipt of an Erase Displayed Memory command. Both displayed
memory and non-displayed memory will be entirely erased simultaneously by
either: The user switching receiver channels or data channels (C1/C2) or
fields (F1/F2) in decoders so equipped; the loss of valid data (see
paragraph (j) of this section); or selecting non-captioning receiver
functions which use the display memory of the decoder. Receipt of an End of
Caption command will cause a displayed caption to become non-displayed (and
vice versa) without being erased from memory. Changing the receiver to a
non-captioning mode which does not require use of the decoder's display
memory will leave that memory intact, and the decoder will continue to
process data as if the caption display were selected.

(1) Roll-up. Roll-up style captioning is initiated by receipt of one of
three Miscellaneous Control Codes that determine the maximum number of rows
displayed simultaneously, either 2, 3 or 4 contiguous rows. These are the
three Roll-Up Caption commands.

(i) The bottom row of the display is known as the “base row”. The cursor
always remains on the base row. Rows of text roll upwards into the
contiguous rows immediately above the base row to create a “window” 2 to 4
rows high.

(ii) The Roll-Up command, in normal practice, will be followed (not
necessarily immediately) by a Preamble Address Code indicating the base row
and the horizontal indent position. If no Preamble Address Code is received,
the base row will default to Row 15 or, if a roll-up caption is currently
displayed, to the same base row last received, and the cursor will be placed
at Column 1. If the Preamble Address Code received contains a different base
row than that of a currently displayed caption, the entire window will move
intact (and without erasing) to the new base row immediately.

(iii) Each time a Carriage Return is received, the text in the top row of
the window is erased from memory and from the display or scrolled off the
top of the window. The remaining rows of text are each rolled up into the
next highest row in the window, leaving the base row blank and ready to
accept new text. This roll-up must appear smooth to the user, and must take
no more than 0.433 second to complete. The cursor is automatically placed at
Column 1 (pending receipt of a Preamble Address Code).

(iv) Increasing or decreasing the number of roll-up rows instantly changes
the size of the active display window, appropriately turning on or off the
display of the top one or two rows. A row which is turned off should also be
erased from memory.

(v) Characters are always displayed immediately when received by the
receiver. Once the cursor reaches the 32nd column position on any row, all
subsequent characters received prior to a Carriage Return, Preamble Address
Code, or Backspace will be displayed in that column replacing any previous
character occupying that address.

(vi) The cursor moves automatically one column to the right after each
character or Mid-Row Code received. A Backspace will move the cursor one
column to the left, erasing the character or Mid-Row Code occupying that
location. (A Backspace received when the cursor is in Column 1 will be
ignored.)

(vii) The Delete to End of Row command will erase from memory any characters
or control codes starting at the current cursor location and in all columns
to its right on the same row. If no displayable characters remain on the row
after the Delete to End of Row is acted upon, the solid space (if any) for
that row should also be erased to conform with the following provisions.

(viii) If a solid space is used for legibility, it should appear when the
first displayable character (not a transparent space) or Mid-Row Code is
received on a row, not when the Preamble Address Code, if any, is given. A
row on which there are no displayable characters or Mid-Row Codes will not
display a solid space, even when rolled up between two rows which do display
a solid space.

(ix) If the reception of data for a row is interrupted by data for the
alternate data channel or for Text Mode, the display of caption text will
resume from the same cursor position if a Roll-Up Caption command is
received and no Preamble Address Code is given which would move the cursor.

(x) A roll-up caption remains displayed until one of the standard caption
erasure techniques is applied. Receipt of a Resume Caption Loading command
(for pop-on style) or a Resume Direct Captioning command (for paint-on
style) will not affect a roll-up display. Receipt of a Roll-Up Caption
command will cause any pop-on or paint-on caption to be erased from
displayed memory and non-displayed memory.

(2) Pop-on. Pop-on style captioning is initiated by receipt of a Resume
Caption Loading command. Subsequent data are loaded into a non-displayed
memory and held there until an End of Caption command is received, at which
point the non-displayed memory becomes the displayed memory and vice versa.
(This process is often referred to as “flipping memories” and does not
automatically erase memory.) An End of Caption command forces the receiver
into pop-on style if no Resume Caption Loading command has been received
which would do so. The display will be capable of 4 full rows, not
necessarily contiguous, simultaneous anywhere on the screen.

(i) Preamble Address Codes can be used to move the cursor around the screen
in random order to place captions on Rows 1 to 15. Carriage Returns have no
effect on cursor location during caption loading.

(ii) The cursor moves automatically one column to the right after each
character or Mid-Row Code received. Receipt of a Backspace will move the
cursor one column to the left, erasing the character or Mid-Row Code
occupying that location. (A Backspace received when the cursor is in Column
1 will be ignored.) Once the cursor reaches the 32nd column position on any
row, all subsequent characters received prior to a Backspace, an End of
Caption, or a Preamble Address Code, will replace any previous character at
that location.

(iii) The Delete to End of Row command will erase from memory any characters
or control codes starting at the current cursor location and in all columns
to its right on the same row. If no displayable characters remain on a row
after the Delete to End of Row is acted upon, the solid space (if any) for
that element should also be erased.

(iv) If data reception is interrupted during caption loading by data for the
alternate caption channel or for Text Mode, caption loading will resume at
the same cursor position if a Resume Caption Loading command is received and
no Preamble Address Code is given that would move the cursor.

(v) Characters remain in non-displayed memory until an End of Caption
command flips memories. The caption will be erased without being displayed
upon receipt of an Erase Non-Displayed Memory command, a Roll-Up Caption
command, or if the user switches receiver channels, data channels or fields,
or upon the loss of valid data (see paragraph (j) of this section).

(vi) A pop-on caption, once displayed, remains displayed until one of the
standard caption erasure techniques is applied or until a Roll-Up Caption
command is received. Characters within a displayed pop-on caption will be
replaced by receipt of the Resume Direct Captioning command and paint-on
style techniques (see below).

(3) Paint-on. Paint-on style captioning is initiated by receipt of a Resume
Direct Captioning command. Subsequent data are addressed immediately to
displayed memory without need for an End of Caption command.

(i) Preamble Address Codes can be used to move the cursor around the screen
in random order to display captions on Rows 1 to 15. Carriage Returns have
no affect on cursor location during direct captioning. The cursor moves
automatically one column to the right after each character or Mid-Row Code
is received. Receipt of a Backspace will move the cursor one column to the
left, erasing the character or Mid-Row Code occupying that location. (A
Backspace received when the cursor is in Column 1 will be ignored.) Once the
cursor reaches the 32nd column position on any row, all subsequent
characters received prior to a Preamble Address Code or Backspace will be
displayed in that column replacing any previous character occupying that
location.

(ii) The Delete to End of Row command will erase from memory any characters
or control codes starting at the current cursor location and in all columns
to its right on the same row. If no displayable characters remain on the row
after the Delete to End of Row is acted upon, the solid space (if any) for
that element should also be erased.

(iii) If the reception of data is interrupted during the direct captioning
by data for the alternate caption channel or for Text Mode, the display of
caption text will resume at the same cursor position if a Resume Direct
Captioning command is received and no Preamble Address Code is given which
would move the cursor.

(iv) Characters remain displayed until one of the standard caption erasure
techniques is applied or until a Roll-Up Caption command is received. An End
of Caption command leaves a paint-on caption fully intact in non-displayed
memory. In other words, a paint-on style caption behaves precisely like a
pop-on style caption which has been displayed.

(g) Character format. Characters are to be displayed on the screen within a
character “cell” which is the height and width of a single row and column.
The following codes define the displayable character set. Television
receivers manufactured prior to January 1, 1996 and having a character
resolution of 5×7 dots, or less, may display the allowable alternate
characters in the character table. A statement must be in a prominent
location on the box or other package in which the receiver is to be
marketed, and information must be in the owner's manual, indicating the
receiver displays closed captioning in upper case only.

Character Set Table

Special Characters

These require two bytes for each symbol. Each hex code as shown will be
preceded by a 11h for data channel 1 or by a 19h for data channel 2. For
example: 19h 37h will place a musical note in data channel 2.
HEX Example Alternate Description
30 ® See note^1 Registered mark symbol
31 ° Degree sign
32 1/2 1/2
33 ¿ Inverse query
34 ^TM See note^1 Trademark symbol
35 ¢ Cents sign
36 £ Pounds Sterling sign
37 ♪ Music note
38 à A Lower-case a with grave accent
39 Transparent space
3A è E Lower-case e with grave accent
3B â A Lower-case a with circumflex
3C ê E Lower-case e with circumflex
3D î I Lower-case i with circumflex
3E ô O Lower-case o with circumflex
3F û U Lower-case u with circumflex

^1Note: The registered and trademark symbols are used to satisfy certain
legal requirements. There are various legal ways in which these symbols may
be drawn or displayed. For example, the trademark symbol may be drawn with
the “T” next to the “M” or over the “M”. It is preferred that the trademark
symbol be superscripted, i.e., XYZ^TM. It is left to each individual
manufacturer to interpret these symbols in any way that meets the legal
needs of the user.

Standard characters
HEX Example Alternate Description
20 Standard space
21 ! Exclamation mark
22 “ Quotation mark
23 # Pounds (number) sign
24 $ Dollar sign
25 % Percentage sign
26 & Ampersand
27 ' Apostrophe
28 ( Open parentheses
29 ) Close parentheses
2A á A Lower-case a with acute accent
2B + Plus sign
2C , Comma
2D − Minus (hyphen) sign
2E . Period
2F / Slash
30 0 Zero
31 1 One
32 2 Two
33 3 Three
34 4 Four
35 5 Five
36 6 Six
37 7 Seven
38 8 Eight
39 9 Nine
3A : Colon
3B ; Semi-colon
3C < Less than sign
3D = Equal sign
3E > Greater than sign
3F ? Question mark
40 @ At sign
41 A Upper-case A
42 B Upper-case B
43 C Upper-case C
44 D Upper-case D
45 E Upper-case E
46 F Upper-case F
47 G Upper-case G
48 H Upper-case H
49 I Upper-case I
4A J Upper-case J
4B K Upper-case K
4C L Upper-case L
4D M Upper-case M
4E N Upper-case N
4F O Upper-case O
50 P Upper-case P
51 Q Upper-case Q
52 R Upper-case R
53 S Upper-case S
54 T Upper-case T
55 U Upper-case U
56 V Upper-case V
57 W Upper-case W
58 X Upper-case X
59 Y Upper-case Y
5A Z Upper-case Z
5B [ Open bracket
5C é E Lower-case e with acute accent
5D ] Close bracket
5E í I Lower-case i with acute accent
5F ó O Lower-case o with acute accent
60 ú U Lower-case u with acute accent
61 a A Lower-case a
62 b B Lower-case b
63 c C Lower-case c
64 d D Lower-case d
65 e E Lower-case e
66 f F Lower-case f
67 g G Lower-case g
68 h H Lower-case h
69 i I Lower-case i
6A j J Lower-case j
6B k K Lower-case k
6C l L Lower-case l
6D m M Lower-case m
6E n N Lower-case n
6F o O Lower-case o
70 p P Lower-case p
71 q Q Lower-case q
72 r R Lower-case r
73 s S Lower-case s
74 t T Lower-case t
75 u U Lower-case u
76 v V Lower-case v
77 w W Lower-case w
78 x X Lower-case x
79 y Y Lower-case y
7A z Z Lower-case z
7B ç C Lower-case c with cedilla
7C ÷ Division sign
7D Ñ Upper-case N with tilde
7E ñ Ñ Lower-case n with tilde
7F ∎ Solid block

(h) Character Attributes —(1) Transmission of Attributes. A character may be
transmitted with any or all of four attributes: Color, italics, underline,
and flash. All of these attributes are set by control codes included in the
received data. An attribute will remain in effect until changed by another
control code or until the end of the row is reached. Each row begins with a
control code which sets the color and underline attributes. (White
non-underlined is the default display attribute if no Preamble Address Code
is received before the first character on an empty row.) Attributes are not
affected by transparent spaces within a row.

(i) All Mid-Row Codes and the Flash On command are spacing attributes which
appear in the display just as if a standard space (20h) had been received.
Preamble Address Codes are non-spacing and will not alter any attributes
when used to position the cursor in the midst of a row of characters.

(ii) The color attribute has the highest priority and can only be changed by
the Mid-Row Code of another color. Italics has the next highest priority. If
characters with both color and italics are desired, the italics Mid-Row Code
must follow the color assignment. Any color Mid-Row Code will turn off
italics. If the least significant bit of a Preamble Address Code or of a
color or italics Mid-Row Code is a 1 (high), underlining is turned on. If
that bit is a 0 (low), underlining is off.

(iii) The flash attribute is transmitted as a Miscellaneous Control Code.
The Flash On command will not alter the status of the color, italics, or
underline attributes. However, any color or italics Mid-Row Code will turn
off flash.

(iv) Thus, for example, if a red, italicized, underlined, flashing character
is desired, the attributes must be received in the following order: a red
Mid-Row or Preamble Address Code, an italics Mid-Row Code with underline
bit, and the Flash On command. The character will then be preceded by three
spaces (two if red was assigned via a Preamble Address Code).

(2) Display of attributes. The underline attribute will be displayed by
drawing a line beneath the character in the same color as the character. The
flash attribute will be displayed by causing the character to blink from the
display at least once per second. The italic attribute must be capable of
being displayed by either a special italic font, or by the modification of
the standard font by slanting. The user may be given the option to select
other methods of italic display as well. The support of the color attributes
is optional. If the color attributes are supported, they will be displayed
in the color they have been assigned. If color attributes are not supported,
the display may be in color, but all color changes will be ignored.

(i) Control codes. There are three different types of control codes used to
identify the format, location, attributes, and display of characters:
Preamble Address Codes, Mid-Row Codes, and Miscellaneous Control Codes.

(1) Each control code consists of a pair of bytes which are always
transmitted together in a single field of line 21 and which are normally
transmitted twice in succession to help insure correct reception of the
control instructions. The first of the control code bytes is a non-printing
character in the range 10h to 1Fh. The second byte is always a printing
character in the range 20h to 7Fh. Any such control code pair received which
has not been assigned a function is ignored. If the non-printing character
in the pair is in the range 00h to 0Fh, that character alone will be ignored
and the second character will be treated normally.

(2) If the second byte of a control code pair does not contain odd parity
(see paragraph (j) of this section), then the pair is ignored. The redundant
transmission of the pair will be the instruction upon which the receiver
acts.

(3) If the first byte of the first transmission of a control code pair fails
the parity check, then that byte is inserted into the currently active
memory as a solid block character (7Fh) followed by whatever the second byte
is. Again, the redundant transmission of the pair will be the controlling
instruction.

(4) If the first transmission of a control code pair passes parity, it is
acted upon within one video frame. If the next frame contains a perfect
repeat of the same pair, the redundant code is ignored. If, however, the
next frame contains a different but also valid control code pair, this pair,
too, will be acted upon (and the receiver will expect a repeat of this
second pair in the next frame). If the first byte of the expected redundant
control code pair fails the parity check and the second byte is identical to
the second byte in the immediately preceding pair, then the expected
redundant code is ignored. If there are printing characters in place of the
redundant code, they will be processed normally.

(5) There is provision for decoding a second data channel. The second data
channel is encoded with the same control codes and procedures already
described. The first byte of every control code pair indicates the data
channel (C1/C2) to which the command applies. Control codes which do not
match the data channel selected by the user, and all subsequent data related
to that control code, are ignored by the receiver.

Mid-Row Codes
Data channel 1 Data channel 2 Attribute description
11 20 19 20 White.
11 21 19 21 White Underline.
11 22 19 22 Green.
11 23 19 23 Green Underline.
11 24 19 24 Blue.
11 25 19 25 Blue Underline.
11 26 19 26 Cyan.
11 27 19 27 Cyan Underline.
11 28 19 28 Red.
11 29 19 29 Red Underline.
11 2A 19 2A Yellow.
11 2B 19 2B Yellow Underline.
11 2C 19 2C Magenta.
11 2D 19 2D Magenta Underline.
11 2E 19 2E Italics.
11 2F 19 2F Italics Underline.

Miscellaneous Control Codes
Data channel 1 Data channel 2 Mne-
monic Command description
14 20 1C 20 RCL Resume caption loading.
14 21 1C 21 BS Backspace.
14 22 1C 22 AOF Reserved (formerly Alarm Off).
14 23 1C 23 AON Reserved (formerly Alarm On).
14 24 1C 24 DER Delete to End of Row.
14 25 1C 25 RU2 Roll-Up Captions–2 Rows.
14 26 1C 26 RU3 Roll-Up Captions–3 Rows.
14 27 1C 27 RU4 Roll-Up Captions–4 Rows.
14 28 1C 28 FON Flash On.
14 29 1C 29 RDC Resume Direct Captioning.
14 2A 1C 2A TR Text Restart.
14 2B 1C 2B RTD Resume Text Display.
14 2C 1C 2C EDM Erase Displayed Memory.
14 2D 1C 2D CR Carriage Return.
14 2E 1C 2E ENM Erase Non-Displayed Memory.
14 2F 1C 2F EOC End of Caption (Flip Memories).
17 21 1F 21 TO1 Tab Offset 1 Column.
17 22 1F 22 TO2 Tab Offset 2 Columns.
17 23 1F 23 TO3 Tab Offset 3 Columns.

Preamble Address Codes
Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Row 5 Row 6 Row 7 Row 8 Row 9 Row 10 Row 11 Row
12 Row 13 Row 14 Row 15
First byte of code pair:
Data Channel 1 11 11 12 12 15 15 16 16 17 17 10 13 13 14 14
Data Channel 2 19 19 1A 1A 1D 1D 1E 1E 1F 1F 18 1B 1B 1C 1C
Second byte of code pair:
White 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 60 40 40 60 40 60
White Underline 41 61 41 61 41 61 41 61 41 61 41 41 61 41 61
Green 42 62 42 62 42 62 42 62 42 62 42 42 62 42 62
Green Underline 43 63 43 63 43 63 43 63 43 63 43 43 63 43 63
Blue 44 64 44 64 44 64 44 64 44 64 44 44 64 44 64
Blue Underline 45 65 45 65 45 65 45 65 45 65 45 45 65 45 65
Cyan 46 66 46 66 46 66 46 66 46 66 46 46 66 46 66
Cyan Underline 47 67 47 67 47 67 47 67 47 67 47 47 67 47 67
Red 48 68 48 68 48 68 48 68 48 68 48 48 68 48 68
Red Underline 49 69 49 69 49 69 49 69 49 69 49 49 69 49 69
Yellow 4A 6A 4A 6A 4A 6A 4A 6A 4A 6A 4A 4A 6A 4A 6A
Yellow Underline 4B 6B 4B 6B 4B 6B 4B 6B 4B 6B 4B 4B 68 4B 6B
Magenta 4C 6C 4C 6C 4C 6C 4C 6C 4C 6C 4C 4C 6C 4C 6C
Magenta Underline 4D 6D 4D 6D 4D 6D 4D 6D 4D 6D 4D 4D 6D 4D 6D
White Italics 4E 6E 4E 6E 4E 6E 4E 6E 4E 6E 4E 4E 6E 4E 6E
White Italics Underline 4F 6F 4F 6F 4F 6F 4F 6F 4F 6F 4F 4F 6F 4F 6F
Indent 0 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 50 70 50 70
Indent 0 Underline 51 71 51 71 51 71 51 71 51 71 51 51 71 51 71
Indent 4 52 72 52 72 52 72 52 72 52 72 52 52 72 52 72
Indent 4 Underline 53 73 53 73 53 73 53 73 53 73 53 53 73 53 73
Indent 8 54 74 54 74 54 74 54 74 54 74 54 54 74 54 74
Indent 8 Underline 55 75 55 75 55 75 55 75 55 75 55 55 75 55 75
Indent 12 56 76 56 76 56 76 56 76 56 76 56 56 76 56 76
Indent 12 Underline 57 77 57 77 57 77 57 77 57 77 57 57 77 57 77
Indent 16 58 78 58 78 58 78 58 78 58 78 58 58 78 58 78
Indent 16 Underline 59 79 59 79 59 79 59 79 59 79 59 59 79 59 79
Indent 20 5A 7A 5A 7A 5A 7A 5A 7A 5A 7A 5A 5A 7A 5A 7A
Indent 20 Underline 5B 7B 5B 7B 5B 7B 5B 7B 5B 7B 5B 5B 7B 5B 7B
Indent 24 5C 7C 5C 7C 5C 7C 5C 7C 5C 7C 5C 5C 7C 5C 7C
Indent 24 Underline 5D 7D 5D 7D 5D 7D 5D 7D 5D 7D 5D 5D 7D 5D 7D
Indent 28 5E 7E 5E 7E 5E 7E 5E 7E 5E 7E 5E 5E 7E 5E 7E
Indent 28 Underline 5F 7F 5F 7F 5F 7F 5F 7F 5F 7F 5F 5F 7F 5F 7F

Note: All indent codes (second byte equals 50h–5fh, 70th–7fh) assign white
as the color attribute.

(j) Data rejection. The receiver should provide an effective procedure to
verify data. A receiver will reject data if the data is invalid, or if the
data is directed to the data channel or field not selected by the user.
Invalid data is any data that fails to pass a check for odd parity, or
which, having passed the parity check, is assigned no function.

(1) If a print character fails to pass a check for parity, a solid block
(7Fh) should be displayed in place of the failed character. In addition,
valid data can be corrupted in many ways and may not be suitable for
display. For example, repeated fields, skipped fields and altered field
sequences are all possible from consumer video equipment and might present
meaningless captions.

(2) The receiver will ignore data rejected due to being directed to a
deselected field or channel. However, this will not cause the display to be
disabled.

(k) Automatic display enable/disable. The receiver shall provide an
automatic enable/disable capability to prevent the display of invalid or
incomplete data, when the user selects the Caption Mode. The display should
automatically become enable after the receiver verifies the data as
described in paragraph (j) of this section. The display will be
automatically disabled when there is a sustained detection of invalid data.
The display will be re-enabled when the data verification process has been
satisfied once again.

(l) Compatibility with Cable Security Systems. Certain cable television
security techniques, such as signal encryption and copy protection, can
alter the television signal so that some methods of finding line 21 will not
work. In particular, counting of lines or timing from the start of the
vertical blanking interval may cause problems. Caption decoding circuitry
must function properly when receiving signals from cable security systems
that were designed and marketed prior to April 5, 1991. Further information
concerning such systems is available from the National Cable Television
Association, Inc., Washington, DC, and from the Electronic Industries
Association, Washington, DC.

(m) Labelling and consumer information requirements. The box or other
package in which the individual television receiver is to be marketed shall
carry a statement in a prominent location, visible to the buyer before
purchase, which reads as follows:

This television receiver provides display of television closed captioning in
accordance with §15.119 of the FCC rules.

Receivers that do not support color attributes or text mode, as well as
receivers that display only upper-case characters pursuant to paragraph (g)
of this section, must include with the statement, and in the owner's manual,
language indicating that those features are not supported.

(n) Glossary of terms. The following terms are used to describe caption
decoder specifications:

(1) Base row: The bottom row of a roll-up display. The cursor always remains
on the base row. Rows of text roll upwards into the contiguous rows
immediately above the base row.

(2) Box: The area surrounding the active character display. In Text Mode,
the box is the entire screen area defined for display, whether or not
displayable characters appear. In Caption Mode, the box is dynamically
redefined by each caption and each element of displayable characters within
a caption. The box (or boxes, in the case of a multiple-element caption)
includes all the cells of the displayed characters, the non-transparent
spaces between them, and one cell at the beginning and end of each row
within a caption element in those decoders that use a solid space to improve
legibility.

(3) Caption window: The invisible rectangle which defines the top and bottom
limits of a roll-up caption. The window can be 2 to 4 rows high. The lowest
row of the window is called the base row.

(4) Cell: The discrete screen area in which each displayable character or
space may appear. A cell is one row high and one column wide.

(5) Column: One of 32 vertical divisions of the screen, each of equal width,
extending approximately across the full width of the safe caption area as
defined in paragraph (n)(12) of this section. Two additional columns, one at
the left of the screen and one at the right, may be defined for the
appearance of a box in those decoders which use a solid space to improve
legibility, but no displayable characters may appear in those additional
columns. For reference, columns may be numbered 0 to 33, with columns 1 to
32 reserved for displayable characters.

(6) Displayable character: Any letter, number or symbol which is defined for
on-screen display, plus the 20h space.

(7) Display disable: To turn off the display of captions or text (and
accompanying background) at the receiver, rather than through codes
transmitted on line 21 which unconditionally erase the display. The receiver
may disable the display because the user selects an alternate mode, e.g., TV
Mode, or because no valid line 21 data is present.

(8) Display enable: To allow the display of captions or text when they are
transmitted on line 21 and received as valid data. For display to be
enabled, the user must have selected Caption Mode or Text Mode, and valid
data for the selected mode must be present on line 21.

(9) Element: In a pop-on or paint-on style caption, each contiguous area of
cells containing displayable characters and non-transparent spaces between
those characters. A single caption may have multiple elements. An element is
not necessarily a perfect rectangle, but may include rows of differing
widths.

(10) Erase Display: In Caption Mode, to clear the screen of all characters
(and accompanying background) in response to codes transmitted on line 21.
(The caption service provider can accomplish the erasure either by sending
an Erase Displayed Memory command or by sending an Erase Non-Displayed
Memory command followed by an End of Caption command, effectively making a
blank caption “appear”.) Display can also be erased by the receiver when the
caption memory erasure conditions are met, such as the user changing TV
channels.

(11) Row: One of 15 horizontal divisions of the screen, extending across the
full height of the safe caption area as defined in paragraph (n)(12) of this
section.

(12) Safe caption area: The area of the television picture within which
captioning and text shall be displayed to ensure visibility of the
information on the majority of home television receivers. The safe caption
area is specified as shown in the following figure:
[ec03jn91.009.gif]

View or download PDF

The dimensions of the above figure shall be as follows:
Label Dimensions Percent of television picture height
A Television picture height 100.0
B Television picture width 133.33
C Height of safe caption area 80.0
D Width of safe caption area 106.67
E Vertical position of safe caption area 10.0
F Horizontal position of safe caption area 13.33

(13) Special characters: Displayable characters (except for “transparent
space”) which require a two-byte sequence of one non-printing and one
printing character. The non-printing byte varies depending on the data
channel. Regular characters require unique one-byte codes which are the same
in either data channel.

(14) Text: When written with an upper-case “T”, refers to the Text Mode.
When written with a lower-case “t”, refers to any combination of displayable
characters.

(15) Transparent space: Transmitted as a special character, it is a
one-column-wide space behind which program video is always visible (except
when a transparent space immediately precedes or follows a displayable
character and solid box is needed to make that character legible).

[ 56 FR 27201 , June 13, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 19094 , May 4, 1992; 58 FR 44893 , Aug. 25, 1993]

§ 15.120 Program blocking technology requirements for television receivers.

top

(a) Effective July 1, 1999, manufacturers of television broadcast receivers
as defined in section 15.3(w) of this chapter, including personal computer
systems meeting that definition, must ensure that one-half of their product
models with picture screens 33 cm (13 in) or larger in diameter shipped in
interstate commerce or manufactured in the United States comply with the
provisions of paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section.

Note: This paragraph places no restrictions on the shipping or sale of
television receivers that were manufactured before July 1999.

(b) Effective January 1, 2000, all TV broadcast receivers as defined in
section 15.3(w) of this chapter, including personal computer systems meeting
that definition, with picture screens 33 cm (13 in) or larger in diameter
shipped in interstate commerce or manufactured in the United States shall
comply with the provisions of paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section.

(c) Transmission format. (1) Analog television program rating information
shall be transmitted on line 21 of field 2 of the vertical blanking interval
of television signals, in accordance with §73.682(a)(22) of this chapter.

(2) Digital television program rating information shall be transmitted in
digital television signals in accordance with §73.682(d) of this chapter.

(d) Operation. (1) Analog television receivers will receive program ratings
transmitted pursuant to EIA–744: “Transport of Content Advisory Information
Using Extended Data Service (XDS)” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38)
and EIA–608: “Recommended Practice for Line 21 Data Service” (incorporated
by reference, see §15.38). Blocking of programs shall occur when a program
rating is received that meets the pre-determined user requirements.

(2) Digital television receivers shall react in a similar manner as analog
televisions when programmed to block specific rating categories. Effective
March 15, 2006, digital television receivers will receive program rating
descriptors transmitted pursuant to industry standard EIA/CEA–766–A “U.S.
and Canadian Region Rating Tables (RRT) and Content Advisory Descriptors for
Transport of Content Advisory Information using ATSC A/65–A Program and
System Information Protocol (PSIP),” 2001 (incorporated by reference, see
§15.38). Blocking of programs shall occur when a program rating is received
that meets the pre-determined user requirements. Digital television
receivers shall be able to respond to changes in the content advisory rating
system.

(e) All television receivers as described in paragraph (a) of this section
shall block programming as follows:

(1) Channel Blocking. Channel Blocking should occur as soon as a program
rating packet with the appropriate Content Advisory or MPAA rating level is
received. Program blocking is described as a receiver performing all of the
following:

• Muting the program audio.

• Rendering the video black or otherwise indecipherable.

• Eliminating program-related captions.

(2) Default State. The default state of a receiver (i.e., as provided to the
consumer) should not block unrated programs. However, it is permissible to
include features that allow the user to reprogram the receiver to block
programs that are not rated.

(3) Picture-In-Picture (PIP). If a receiver has the ability to decode
program-related rating information for the Picture-In-Picture (PIP) video
signal, then it should block the PIP channel in the same manner as the main
channel. If the receiver does not have the ability to decode PIP
program-related rating information, then it should block or otherwise
disable the PIP if the viewer has enabled program blocking.

(4) Selection of Ratings. Each television receiver, in accordance with user
input, shall block programming based on the age based ratings, the content
based ratings, or a combination of the two.

(i) If the user chooses to block programming according to its age based
rating level, the receiver must have the ability to automatically block
programs with a more restrictive age based rating. For example, if all shows
with an age-based rating of TV-PG have been selected for blocking, the user
should be able to automatically block programs with the more restrictive
ratings of TV–14 and TV-MA.

(ii) If the user chooses to block programming according to a combination of
age based and content based ratings the receiver must have the ability to
automatically block programming with a more restrictive age rating but a
similar content rating. For example, if all shows rated TV-PG-V have been
selected for blocking, the user should be able to block automatically shows
with the more restrictive ratings of TV–14–V and TV-MA-V.

(iii) The user should have the capability of overriding the automatic
blocking described in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and (4)(ii) of this section.

[ 63 FR 20133 , Apr. 23, 1998, as amended at 68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003; 69 FR 2849 , Jan. 21, 2004; 69 FR 59534 , Oct. 4, 2004]

§ 15.121 Scanning receivers and frequency converters used with scanning
receivers.

top

(a) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, scanning receivers
and frequency converters designed or marketed for use with scanning
receivers, shall:

(1) Be incapable of operating (tuning), or readily being altered by the user
to operate, within the frequency bands allocated to the Cellular
Radiotelephone Service in part 22 of this chapter (cellular telephone
bands). Scanning receivers capable of “readily being altered by the user”
include, but are not limited to, those for which the ability to receive
transmissions in the cellular telephone bands can be added by clipping the
leads of, or installing, a simple component such as a diode, resistor or
jumper wire; replacing a plug-in semiconductor chip; or programming a
semiconductor chip using special access codes or an external device, such as
a personal computer. Scanning receivers, and frequency converters designed
for use with scanning receivers, also shall be incapable of converting
digital cellular communication transmissions to analog voice audio.

(2) Be designed so that the tuning, control and filtering circuitry is
inaccessible. The design must be such that any attempts to modify the
equipment to receive transmissions from the Cellular Radiotelephone Service
likely will render the receiver inoperable.

(b) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, scanning receivers
shall reject any signals from the Cellular Radiotelephone Service frequency
bands that are 38 dB or lower based upon a 12 dB SINAD measurement, which is
considered the threshold where a signal can be clearly discerned from any
interference that may be present.

(c) Scanning receivers and frequency converters designed or marketed for use
with scanning receivers, are not subject to the requirements of paragraphs
(a) and (b) of this section provided that they are manufactured exclusively
for, and marketed exclusively to, entities described in 18 U.S.C. 2512(2),
or are marketed exclusively as test equipment pursuant to §15.3(dd).

(d) Modification of a scanning receiver to receive transmissions from
Cellular Radiotelephone Service frequency bands will be considered to
constitute manufacture of such equipment. This includes any individual,
individuals, entity or organization that modifies one or more scanners. Any
modification to a scanning receiver to receive transmissions from the
Cellular Radiotelephone Service frequency bands voids the certification of
the scanning receiver, regardless of the date of manufacture of the original
unit. In addition, the provisions of §15.23 shall not be interpreted as
permitting modification of a scanning receiver to receiver Cellular
Radiotelephone Service transmissions.

(e) Scanning receivers and frequency converters designed for use with
scanning receivers shall not be assembled from kits or marketed in kit form
unless they comply with the requirements in paragraph (a) through (c) of
this section.

(f) Scanning receivers shall have a label permanently affixed to the
product, and this label shall be readily visible to the purchaser at the
time of purchase. The label shall read as follows: WARNING: MODIFICATION OF
THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED
UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW.

(1) “Permanently affixed” means that the label is etched, engraved, stamped,
silkscreened, indelible printed or otherwise permanently marked on a
permanently attached part of the equipment or on a nameplate of metal,
plastic or other material fastened to the equipment by welding, riveting, or
permanent adhesive. The label shall be designed to last the expected
lifetime of the equipment in the environment in which the equipment may be
operated and must not be readily detachable. The label shall not be a
stick-on, paper label.

(2) When the device is so small that it is not practicable to place the
warning label on it, the information required by this paragraph shall be
placed in a prominent location in the instruction manual or pamphlet
supplied to the user and shall also be placed on the container in which the
device is marketed. However, the FCC identifier must be displayed on the
device.

[ 64 FR 22561 , Apr. 27, 1999, as amended at 66 FR 32582 , June 15, 2001]

§ 15.122 Closed caption decoder requirements for digital television receivers
and converter boxes.

top

(a)(1) Effective July 1, 2002, all digital television receivers with picture
screens in the 4:3 aspect ratio with picture screens measuring 13 inches or
larger diagonally, all digital television receivers with picture screens in
the 16:9 aspect ratio measuring 7.8 inches or larger vertically and all
separately sold DTV tuners shipped in interstate commerce or manufactured in
the United States shall comply with the provisions of this section.

Note to paragraph(a)(1): This paragraph places no restrictions on the
shipping or sale of digital television receivers that were manufactured
before July 1, 2002.

(2) Effective July 1, 2002, DTV converter boxes that allow digitally
transmitted television signals to be displayed on analog receivers shall
pass available analog caption information to the attached receiver in a form
recognizable by that receiver's built-in caption decoder circuitry.

Note to paragraph(a)(2): This paragraph places no restrictions on the
shipping or sale of DTV converter boxes that were manufactured before July
1, 2002.

(b) Digital television receivers and tuners must be capable of decoding
closed captioning information that is delivered pursuant to EIA–708–B:
“Digital Television (DTV) Closed Captioning” (incorporated by reference, see
§15.38).

(c) Services. (1) Decoders must be capable of decoding and processing data
for the six standard services, Caption Service #1 through Caption Service
#6.

(2) Decoders that rely on Program and System Information Protocol data to
implement closed captioning functions must be capable of decoding and
processing the Caption Service Directory data. Such decoders must be capable
of decoding all Caption Channel Block Headers consisting of Standard Service
Headers, Extended Service Block Headers, and Null Block headers. However,
decoding of the data is required only for Standard Service Blocks (Service
IDs <-6), and then only if the characters for the corresponding language are
supported. The decoders must be able to display the directory for services 1
through 6.

(d) Code space organization. (1) Decoders must support Code Space C0, G0,
C1, and G1 in their entirety.
[er29se00.000.gif]

View or download PDF

(2) The following characters within code space G2 must be supported:

(i) Transparent space ([TSP]).

(ii) Non-breaking transparent space ([NBTSP]).

(iii) Solid block ( ).

(iv) Trademark symbol (^TM ).

(v) Latin-1 characters Š, Œ, š, œ, Ÿ.

(3) The substitutions in Table 2 are to be made if a decoder does not
support the remaining G2 characters.

Table 2—G2 Character Substitution Table
G2 Character Substitute with
Open single quote (‘), G2 char code 0×31 G0 single quote (`), char code 0×27
Close single quote (’), G2 char code 0×32 G0 single quote ('), char code
0×27
Open double quote (“), G2 char code 0×33 G0 double quote (“), char code 0×22
Close double quote (”), G2 char code 0×34 G0 double quote (”), char code
0×22
Bold bullet (•), G2 char code 0×35 G1 bullet (•), char code 0×B7
Elipsis (. . .), G2 char code 0×25 G0 underscore (_), char code 0×5F
One-eighth ( 1/8), G2 char code 0×76 G0 percent sign (%), char code 0×25
Three-eighths ( 3/8), G2 char code 0×77 G0 percent sign (%), char code 0×25
Five-eighths ( 5/8), G2 char code 0×78 G0 percent sign (%), char code 0×25
Seven-eighths ( 7/8), G2 char code 0×79 G0 percent sign (%), char code 0×25
Vertical border (|), G2 char code 0×7A G0 stroke (|), char code 0×7C
Upper-right border (⌉), G2 char code 0×7B G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D
Lower-left border (⌊), G2 char code 0×7C G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D
Horizontal border (―), G2 char code 0×7D G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D
Lower-right border (⌋), G2 char code 0×7E G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D
Upper-left border (⌈), G2 char code 0×7F G0 dash (-), char code 0×2D

(4) Support for code spaces C2, C3, and G3 is optional. All unsupported
graphic symbols in the G3 code space are to be substituted with the G0
underscore character (_), char code 0×5F.

(e) Screen coordinates. Table 3 specifies the screen coordinate resolutions
and limits for anchor point positioning in 4:3 and 16:9 display formats, and
the number of characters per row.

Table 3—Screen Coordinate Resolutions and Limits
Screen aspect ratio Maximum anchor position resolution Minimum anchor
position resolution Maximum displayed rows Maximum characters per row
4:3 75v×160h 15v×32h 4 32
16:9 75v×210h 15v×42h 4 42
Other 75v×(5×H) 15v×H* 4 ^1

^1H = 32 × (the width of the screen in relation to a 4:3 display). For
example, the 16:9 format is 1/3 wider than a 4:3 display; thus, H = 32 * 4/3
= 42.667, or 42.

(1) This means that the minimum grid resolution for a 4:3 aspect ratio
instrument is 15 vertical positions × 32 horizontal positions. This minimum
grid resolution for 16:9 ratio instrument is 15 vertical positions × 42
horizontal positions. These minimum grid sizes are to cover the entire
safe-title area of the corresponding screen.

(2) The minimum coordinates equate to a1/5reduction in the maximum
horizontal and vertical grid resolution coordinates. Caption providers are
to use the maximum coordinate system values when specifying anchor point
positions. Decoders using the minimum resolution are to divide the provided
horizontal and vertical screen coordinates by 5 to derive the equivalent
minimum coordinates.

(3) Any caption targeted for both 4:3 and 16:9 instruments is limited to 32
contiguous characters per row. If a caption is received by a 4:3 instrument
that is targeted for a 16:9 display only, or requires a window width greater
than 32 characters, then the caption may be completely disregarded by the
decoder. 16:9 instruments should be able to process and display captions
intended for 4:3 displays, providing all other minimum recommendations are
met.

(4) If the resulting size of any window is larger than the safe title area
for the corresponding display's aspect ratio, then this window will be
completely disregarded.

(f) Caption windows. (1) Decoders need to display no more than 4 rows of
captions on the screen at any given time, regardless of the number of
windows displayed. This implies that no more than 4 windows can be displayed
at any given time (with each having only one caption row). However, decoders
should maintain storage to support a minimum total of 8 rows of captions.
This storage is needed for the worst-case support of a displayed window with
4 rows of captioning and a non-displayed window which is buffering the
incoming rows for the next 4-row caption. As implied above, the maximum
number of windows that may be displayed at any one time by a minimum decoder
implementation is 4. If more than 4 windows are defined in the caption
stream, the decoder may disregard the youngest and lowest priority window
definition(s). Caption providers must be aware of this limitation, and
either restrict the total number of windows used or accept that some windows
will not be displayed.

(2) Decoders do not need to support overlapped windows. If a window overlaps
another window, the overlapped window need not be displayed by the decoder.

(3) At a minimum, decoders will assume that all windows have rows and
columns “locked”. This implies that if a decoder implements the SMALL
pen-size, then word-“un”wrapping, when shrinking captions, need not be
implemented. Also, if a decoder implements the LARGE pen size, then word
wrapping (when enlarging captions) need not be implemented.

(4) Whenever possible, the receiver should render embedded carriage returns
as line breaks, since these carriage returns indicate an important aspect of
the caption's formatting as determined by the service provider. However, it
may sometimes be necessary for the receiver to ignore embedded line breaks.
For example, if a caption is to appear in a larger font, and if its window's
rows and/or columns are unlocked, the rows of text may need to become longer
or shorter to fit within the allocated space. Such automatic reformatting of
a caption is known as “word wrap.” If decoders support word-wrapping, it
must be implemented as follows:

(i) The receiver should follow standard typographic practice when
implementing word wrap. Potential breaking points (word-wrapping points) are
indicated by the space character (20h) and by the hyphen character (2Dh).

(ii) If a row is to be broken at a space, the receiver should remove the
space from the caption display. If a row is to be broken after a hyphen, the
hyphen should be retained.

(iii) If an embedded return is to be removed, it should usually be replaced
with a space. However, if the character to the left of the embedded return
is a hyphen, the embedded return should be removed but NOT replaced with a
space.

(iv) This specification does not include optional hyphens, nor does it
provide for any form of automatic hyphenation. No non-breaking hyphen is
defined. The non-breaking space (A0h in the G1 code set) and the
non-breaking transparent space (21h in the G2 code set) should not be
considered as potential line breaks.

(v) If a single word exceeds the length of a row, the word should be placed
at the start of a new row, broken at the character following the last
character that fits on the row, and continued with further breaks if needed.

(g) Window text painting. (1) All decoders should implement “left”,
“right”, and “center” caption-text justification. Implementation of “full”
justification is optional. If “full” justification is not implemented, fully
justified captions should be treated as though they are “left” justified.

(i) For “left” justification, decoders should display any portion of a
received row of text when it is received. For “center”, “right”, and
“full” justification, decoders may display any portion of a received row of
text when it is received, or may delay display of a received row of text
until reception of a row completion indicator. A row completion indicator is
defined as receipt of a CR, ETX or any other command, except SetPenColor,
SetPenAttributes, or SetPenLocation where the pen relocation is within the
same row.

(ii) Receipt of a character for a displayed row which already contains text
with “center”, “right” or “full” justification will cause the row to be
cleared prior to the display of the newly received character and any
subsequent characters. Receipt of a justification command which changes the
last received justification for a given window will cause the window to be
cleared.

(2) At a minimum, decoders must support LEFT_TO_RIGHT printing.

(3) At a minimum, decoders must support BOTTOM_TO_TOP scrolling. For windows
sharing the same horizontal scan lines on the display, scrolling may be
disabled.

(4) At a minimum, decoders must support the same recommended practices for
scroll rate as is provided for NTSC closed-captioning.

(5) At a minimum, decoders must support the same recommended practices for
smooth scrolling as is provided for NTSC closed-captioning.

(6) At a minimum, decoders must implement the “snap” window display effect.
If the window “fade” and “wipe” effects are not implemented, then the
decoder will “snap” all windows when they are to be displayed, and the
“effect speed” parameter is ignored.

(h) Window colors and borders. At a minimum, decoders must implement
borderless windows with solid, black backgrounds (i.e., border type = NONE,
fill color = (0,0,0), fill opacity = SOLID), and borderless transparent
windows (i.e., border type = NONE, fill opacity = TRANSPARENT).

(i) Predefined window and pen styles. Predefined Window Style and Pen Style
ID's may be provided in the DefineWindow command. At a minimum, decoders
should implement Predefined Window Attribute Style 1 and Predefined Pen
Attribute Style 1, as shown in Table 4 and Table 5, respectively.

Table 4—Predefined Window Style ID's
Style ID # Justify Print direction Scroll
direction Word wrap Display
effect Effect
direction Effect
speed Fill color Fill opacity Border type Border color Usage
1 Left Left-to-right Bottom-to-top No Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
n/a NTSC Style PopUp Captions
2 Left Left-to-right Bottom-to-top No Snap n/a n/a n/a Transparent None n/a
PopUp Captions w/o Black Background
3 Cntr Left-to-right Bottom-to-top No Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
n/a NTSC Style Centered PopUp Captions
4 Left Left-to-right Bottom-to-top Yes Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
n/a NTSC Style RollUp Captions
5 Left Left-to-right Bottom-to-top Yes Snap n/a n/a n/a Transparent None n/a
RollUp Captions w/o Black Background
6 Cntr Left-to-right Bottom-to-top Yes Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
n/a NTSC Style Centered RollUp Captions
7 Left Top-to-bottom Right-to-left No Snap n/a n/a (0,0,0) Black Solid None
n/a Ticker Tape

Table 5—Predefined Pen Style ID's
Predefined style ID Pen size Font style Offset Italics Underline Edge type
Foregrnd color Foregrnd opacity Backgrnd color Backgrnd opacity Edge color
Usage
1 Stndr 0 Normal No No None (2,2,2) White Solid (0,0,0) Black Solid n/a
Default NTSC Style*
2 Stndr 1 Normal No No None (2,2,2) Solid (0,0,0) White Solid n/a NTSC
Style* Mono w/Serif
3 Stndr 2 Normal No No None (2,2,2) White Solid (0,0,0) Black Solid n/a NTSC
Style* Prop w/ Serif
4 Stndr 3 Normal No No None (2,2,2) White Solid (0,0,0) Black Solid n/a NTSC
Style* Mono w/o Serif
5 Stndr 4 Normal No No None (2,2,2) White Solid (0,0,0) Black Solid n/a NTSC
Style* Prop w/o Serif
6 Stndr 3 Normal No No Unifrm (2,2,2) White Solid n/a Transparent (0,0,0)
Black Mono w/o Serif, Bordered Text, No BG
7 Stndr 4 Normal No No Unifrm (2,2,2) White Solid n/a Transparent (0,0,0)
Black Prop. w/o Serif, Bordered Text, No BG

*“NTSC Style”—White Text on Black Background

(j) Pen size. (1) Decoders must support the standard, large, and small pen
sizes and must allow the caption provider to choose a pen size and allow the
viewer to choose an alternative size. The STANDARD pen size should be
implemented such that the height of the tallest character in any implemented
font is no taller than1/15of the height of the safe-title area, and the
width of the widest character is no wider than1/32of the width of the
safe-title area for 4:3 displays and1/42of the safe-title area width for
16:9 displays.

(2) The LARGE pen size should be implemented such that the width of the
widest character in any implemented font is no wider than1/32of the
safe-title area for 16:9 displays. This recommendation allows for captions
to grow to a LARGE pen size without having to reformat the caption since no
caption will have more than 32 characters per row.

(k) Font styles. (1) Decoders must support the eight fonts listed below.
Caption providers may specify 1 of these 8 font styles to be used to write
caption text. The styles specified in the “font style” parameter of the
SetPenAttributes command are numbered from 0 through 7. The following is a
list of the 8 required font styles. For information purposes only, each font
style references one or more popular fonts which embody the characteristics
of the style:

(i) 0—Default (undefined)

(ii) 1—Monospaced with serifs (similar to Courier)

(iii) 2—Proportionally spaced with serifs (similar to Times New Roman)

(iv) 3—Monospaced without serifs (similar to Helvetica Monospaced)

(v) 4—Proportionally spaced without serifs (similar to Arial and Swiss)

(vi) 5—Casual font type (similar to Dom and Impress)

(vii) 6—Cursive font type (similar to Coronet and Marigold)

(viii) 7—Small capitals (similar to Engravers Gothic)

(2) Font styles may be implemented in any typeface which the decoder
manufacturer deems to be a readable rendition of the font style, and need
not be in the exact typefaces given in the example above. Decoders must
include the ability for consumers to choose among the eight fonts. The
decoder must display the font chosen by the caption provider unless the
viewer chooses a different font.

(l) Character offsetting. Decoders need not implement the character
offsetting ( i.e., subscript and superscript) pen attributes.

(m) Pen styles. At a minimum, decoders must implement normal, italic, and
underline pen styles.

(n) Foreground color and opacity. (1) At a minimum, decoders must implement
transparent, translucent, solid and flashing character foreground type
attributes.

(2) At a minimum, decoders must implement the following character foreground
colors: white, black, red, green, blue, yellow, magenta and cyan.

(3) Caption providers may specify the color/opacity. Decoders must include
the ability for consumers to choose among the color/opacity options. The
decoder must display the color/opacity chosen by the caption provider unless
the viewer chooses otherwise.

(o) Background color and opacity. (1) Decoders must implement the following
background colors: white, black, red, green, blue, yellow, magenta and cyan.
It is recommended that this background is extended beyond the character
foreground to a degree that the foreground is separated from the underlying
video by a sufficient number of background pixels to insure the foreground
is separated from the background.

(2) Decoders must implement transparent, translucent, solid and flashing
background type attributes. Caption providers may specify the color/opacity.
Decoders must include the ability for consumers to choose among the
color/opacity options. The decoder must display the color/opacity chosen by
the caption provider unless the viewer chooses otherwise.

(p) Character edges. Decoders must implement separate edge color and type
attribute control.

(q) Color representation. (1) At a minimum, decoders must support the 8
colors listed in Table 6.

Table 6—Minimum Color List Table
Color Red Green Blue
Black 0 0 0
White 2 2 2
Red 2 0 0
Green 0 2 0
Blue 0 0 2
Yellow 2 2 0
Magenta 2 0 2
Cyan 0 2 2

(2)(i) When a decoder supporting this Minimum Color List receives an RGB
value not in the list, it will map the received value to one of the values
in the list via the following algorithm:

(A) All one (1) values are to be changed to 0.

(B) All two (2) values are to remain unchanged.

(ii) For example, the RGB value (1,2,3) will be mapped to (0,2,2), (3,3,3)
will be mapped to (2,2,2) and (1,1,1) will be mapped to (0,0,0).

(3) Table 7 is an alternative minimum color list table supporting 22 colors.

Table 7—Alternative Minimum Color List Table
Color Red Green Blue
Black 0 0 0
Gray 1 1 1
White 2 2 2
Bright White 3 3 3
Dark Red 1 0 0
Red 2 0 0
Bright Red 3 0 0
Dark Green 0 1 0
Green 0 2 0
Bright Green 0 3 0
Dark Blue 0 0 1
Blue 0 0 2
Bright Blue 0 0 3
Dark Yellow 1 1 0
Yellow 2 2 0
Bright Yellow 3 3 0
Dark Magenta 1 0 1
Magenta 2 0 2
Bright Magenta 3 0 3
Dark Cyan 0 1 1
Cyan 0 2 2
Bright Cyan 0 3 3

(i) When a decoder supporting the Alternative Minimum Color List in Table 7
receives an RGB value not in the list (i.e., an RGB value whose non-zero
elements are not the same value), it will map the received value to one of
the values in the list via the following algorithm:

(A) For RGB values with all elements non-zero and different—e.g., (1,2,3),
(3,2,1), and (2,1,3), the 1 value will be changed to 0, the 2 value will
remain unchanged, and the 3 value will be changed to 2.

(B) For RGB values with all elements non-zero and with two common
elements—e.g. (3,1,3), (2,1,2), and (2,2,3), if the common elements are 3
and the uncommon one is 1, then the 1 elements is changed to 0; e.g. (3,1,3)
→ (3,0,3). If the common elements are 1 and the uncommon element is 3, then
the 1 elements are changed to 0, and the 3 element is changed to 2; e.g.
(1,3,1) → (0,2,0). In all other cases, the uncommon element is changed to
the common value; e.g., (2,2,3) → (2,2,2), (1,2,1) → (1,1,1), and (3,2,3)
→ (3,3,3).

(ii) All decoders not supporting either one of the two color lists described
above, must support the full 64 possible RGB color value combinations.

(r) Character rendition considerations. In NTSC Closed Captioning, decoders
were required to insert leading and trailing spaces on each caption row.
There were two reasons for this requirement:

(1) To provide a buffer so that the first and last characters of a caption
row do not fall outside the safe title area, and

(2) To provide a black border on each side of a character so that the
“white” leading pixels of the first character on a row and the trailing
“white” pixels of the last character on a row do not bleed into the
underlying video.

(i) Since caption windows are required to reside in the safe title area of
the DTV screen, reason 1 (above) is not applicable to DTVCC captions.

(ii) The attributes available in the SetPenAttributes command for character
rendition (e.g., character background and edge attributes) provide unlimited
flexibility to the caption provider when describing caption text in an ideal
decoder implementation. However, manufacturers need not implement all pen
attributes. Thus it is recommended that no matter what the level of
implementation, decoder manufacturers should take into account the
readability of all caption text against a variety of all video backgrounds,
and should implement some automatic character delineation when the
individual control of character foreground, background and edge is not
supported.

(s) Service synchronization. Service Input Buffers must be at least 128
bytes in size. Caption providers must keep this lower limit in mind when
following Delay commands with other commands and window text. In other
words, no more than 128 bytes of DTVCC commands and text should be
transmitted (encoded) before a pending Delay command's delay interval
expires.

(t) Settings. Decoders must include an option that permits a viewer to
choose a setting that will display captions as intended by the caption
provider (a default). Decoders must also include an option that allows a
viewer's chosen settings to remain until the viewer chooses to alter these
settings, including periods when the television is turned off.

[ 65 FR 58471 , Sept. 29, 2000, as amended at 69 FR 2849 , Jan. 21, 2004]

§ 15.123 Labeling of digital cable ready products.

top

(a) The requirements of this section shall apply to unidirectional digital
cable products. Unidirectional digital cable products are one-way devices
that accept a Point of Deployment module (POD) and which include, but are
not limited to televisions, set-top-boxes and recording devices connected to
digital cable systems. Unidirectional digital cable products do not include
interactive two-way digital television products.

(b) A unidirectional digital cable product may not be labeled with or
marketed using the term “digital cable ready,” or other terminology that
describes the device as “cable ready” or “cable compatible,” or otherwise
indicates that the device accepts a POD or conveys the impression that the
device is compatible with digital cable service unless it implements at a
minimum the following features:

(1) Tunes NTSC analog channels transmitted in-the-clear.

(2) Tunes digital channels that are transmitted in compliance with SCTE 40
2003 (formerly DVS 313): “Digital Cable Network Interface Standard”
(incorporated by reference, see §15.38), provided, however, that with
respect to Table B.11 of that standard, the phase noise requirement shall be
–86 dB/Hz including both in-the-clear channels and channels that are subject
to conditional access.

(3) Allows navigation of channels based on channel information (virtual
channel map and source names) provided through the cable system in
compliance with ANSI/SCTE 65 2002 (formerly DVS 234): “Service Information
Delivered Out-of-Band for Digital Cable Television” (incorporated by
reference, see §15.38), and/or PSIP-enabled navigation (ANSI/SCTE 54 2003
(formerly DVS 241): “Digital Video Service Multiplex and Transport System
Standard for Cable Television” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38)).

(4) Includes the POD-Host Interface specified in SCTE 28 2003 (formerly DVS
295): “Host-POD Interface Standard” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38),
and SCTE 41 2003 (formerly DVS 301): “POD Copy Protection System”
(incorporated by reference, see §15.38), or implementation of a more
advanced POD-Host Interface based on successor standards. Support for
Internet protocol flows is not required.

(5) Responds to emergency alerts that are transmitted in compliance with
ANSI/SCTE 54 2003 (formerly DVS 241): “Digital Video Service Multiplex and
Transport System Standard for Cable Television” (incorporated by reference,
see §15.38).

(6) In addition to the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this
section, a unidirectional digital cable television may not be labeled or
marketed as digital cable ready or with other terminology as described in
paragraph (b) of this section, unless it includes a DTV broadcast tuner as
set forth in §15.117(i) and employs at least one specified interface in
accordance with the following schedule:

(i) For 480p grade unidirectional digital cable televisions, either a
DVI/HDCP, HDMI/HDCP, or 480p Y,Pb,Pr interface:

(A) Models with screen sizes 36 inches and above: 50% of a manufacturer's or
importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2004; 100% of such
models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2005.

(B) Models with screen sizes 32 to 35 inches: 50% of a manufacturer's or
importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2005; 100% of such
models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2006.

(ii) For 720p/1080i grade unidirectional digital cable televisions, either a
DVI/HDCP or HDMI/HDCP interface:

(B) Models with screen sizes 25 to 35 inches: 50% of a manufacturer's or
importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2005; 100% of such
models manufactured or imported after July l, 2006.

(C) Models with screen sizes 13 to 24 inches: 100% of a manufacturer's or
importer's models manufactured or imported after July 1, 2007.

(c) Before a manufacturer's or importer's first unidirectional digital cable
product may be labeled or marketed as digital cable ready or with other
terminology as described in paragraph (b) of this section, the manufacturer
or importer shall verify the device as follows:

(1) The manufacturer or importer shall have a sample of its first model of a
unidirectional digital cable product tested to show compliance with the
procedures set forth in Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903: “Uni-Directional Receiving
Device: Conformance Checklist: PICS Proforma” (incorporated by reference,
see §15.38) at a qualified test facility. The manufacturer or importer shall
have any modifications to the product to correct failures of the procedures
in Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903: “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance
Checklist: PICS Proforma” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38) retested
at a qualified test facility.

(2) A qualified test facility is a facility representing cable television
system operators serving a majority of the cable television subscribers in
the United States or an independent laboratory with personnel knowledgeable
with respect to the standards referenced in paragraph (b) of this section
concerning the procedures set forth in Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903:
“Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance Checklist: PICS Proforma”
(incorporated by reference, see §15.38).

(3) Subsequent to the testing of its initial unidirectional digital cable
product model, a manufacturer or importer is not required to have other
models of unidirectional digital cable products tested at a qualified test
facility for compliance with the procedures of Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903:
“Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance Checklist: PICS Proforma”
(incorporated by reference, see §15.38). However, the manufacturer or
importer shall ensure that all subsequent models of unidirectional digital
cable products comply with the procedures in the Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903:
“Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance Checklist: PICS Proforma”
(incorporated by reference, see §15.38) and all other applicable rules and
standards. The manufacturer or importer shall maintain records indicating
such compliance in accordance with the verification procedure requirements
in part 2, subpart J of this chapter. The manufacturer or importer shall
further submit documentation verifying compliance with the procedures in the
Uni-Dir-PICS-I01-030903: “Uni-Directional Receiving Device: Conformance
Checklist: PICS Proforma” (incorporated by reference, see §15.38) to a
facility representing cable television system operators serving a majority
of the cable television subscribers in the United States.

(d) Manufacturers and importers shall provide in appropriate post-sale
material that describes the features and functionality of the product, such
as the owner's guide, the following language: “This digital television is
capable of receiving analog basic, digital basic and digital premium cable
television programming by direct connection to a cable system providing such
programming. A security card provided by your cable operator is required to
view encrypted digital programming. Certain advanced and interactive digital
cable services such as video-on-demand, a cable operator's enhanced program
guide and data-enhanced television services may require the use of a set-top
box. For more information call your local cable operator.”

[ 68 FR 66733 , Nov. 28, 2003]

Subpart C—Intentional Radiators

top

§ 15.201 Equipment authorization requirement.

top

(a) Intentional radiators operated as carrier current systems, devices
operated under the provisions of §§15.211, 15.213, and 15.221, and devices
operating below 490 kHz in which all emissions are at least 40 dB below the
limits in §15.209 shall be verified pursuant to the procedures in Subpart J
of part 2 of this chapter prior to marketing.

(b) Except as otherwise exempted in paragraph (c) of this section and in
§15.23 of this part, all intentional radiators operating under the
provisions of this part shall be certificated by the Commission pursuant to
the procedures in subpart J of part 2 of this chapter prior to marketing.

(c) For devices such as perimeter protection systems which, in accordance
with §15.31(d), are required to be measured at the installation site, each
application for certification must be accompanied by a statement indicating
that the system has been tested at three installations and found to comply
at each installation. Until such time as certification is granted, a given
installation of a system that was measured for the submission for
certification will be considered to be in compliance with the provisions of
this chapter, including the marketing regulations in subpart I of part 2 of
this chapter, if tests at that installation show the system to be in
compliance with the relevant technical requirements. Similarly, where
measurements must be performed on site for equipment subject to
verification, a given installation that has been verified to demonstrate
compliance with the applicable standards will be considered to be in
compliance with the provisions of this chapter, including the marketing
regulations in subpart I of part 2 of this chapter.

(d) For perimeter protection systems operating in the frequency bands
allocated to television broadcast stations operating under part 73 of this
chapter, the holder of the grant of certification must test each
installation prior to initiation of normal operation to verify compliance
with the technical standards and must maintain a list of all installations
and records of measurements. For perimeter protection systems operating
outside of the frequency bands allocated to television broadcast stations,
upon receipt of a grant of certification, further testing of the same or
similar type of system or installation is not required.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.202 Certified operating frequency range.

top

Client devices that operate in a master/client network may be certified if
they have the capability of operating outside permissible part 15 frequency
bands, provided they operate on only permissible part 15 frequencies under
the control of the master device with which they communicate. Master devices
marketed within the United States must be limited to operation on
permissible part 15 frequencies. Client devices that can also act as master
devices must meet the requirements of a master device. For the purposes of
this section, a master device is defined as a device operating in a mode in
which it has the capability to transmit without receiving an enabling
signal. In this mode it is able to select a channel and initiate a network
by sending enabling signals to other devices. A network always has at least
one device operating in master mode. A client device is defined as a device
operating in a mode in which the transmissions of the device are under
control of the master. A device in client mode is not able to initiate a
network.

[ 70 FR 23040 , May 4, 2005]

§ 15.203 Antenna requirement.

top

An intentional radiator shall be designed to ensure that no antenna other
than that furnished by the responsible party shall be used with the device.
The use of a permanently attached antenna or of an antenna that uses a
unique coupling to the intentional radiator shall be considered sufficient
to comply with the provisions of this section. The manufacturer may design
the unit so that a broken antenna can be replaced by the user, but the use
of a standard antenna jack or electrical connector is prohibited. This
requirement does not apply to carrier current devices or to devices operated
under the provisions of §15.211, §15.213, §15.217, §15.219, or §15.221.
Further, this requirement does not apply to intentional radiators that must
be professionally installed, such as perimeter protection systems and some
field disturbance sensors, or to other intentional radiators which, in
accordance with §15.31(d), must be measured at the installation site.
However, the installer shall be responsible for ensuring that the proper
antenna is employed so that the limits in this part are not exceeded.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 28762 , July 13, 1990]

§ 15.204 External radio frequency power amplifiers and antenna modifications.

top

(a) Except as otherwise described in paragraphs (b) and (d) of this section,
no person shall use, manufacture, sell or lease, offer for sale or lease
(including advertising for sale or lease), or import, ship, or distribute
for the purpose of selling or leasing, any external radio frequency power
amplifier or amplifier kit intended for use with a part 15 intentional
radiator.

(b) A transmission system consisting of an intentional radiator, an external
radio frequency power amplifier, and an antenna, may be authorized, marketed
and used under this part. Except as described otherwise in this section,
when a transmission system is authorized as a system, it must always be
marketed as a complete system and must always be used in the configuration
in which it was authorized.

(c) An intentional radiator may be operated only with the antenna with which
it is authorized. If an antenna is marketed with the intentional radiator,
it shall be of a type which is authorized with the intentional radiator. An
intentional radiator may be authorized with multiple antenna types.

(1) The antenna type, as used in this paragraph, refers to antennas that
have similar in-band and out-of-band radiation patterns.

(2) Compliance testing shall be performed using the highest gain antenna for
each type of antenna to be certified with the intentional radiator. During
this testing, the intentional radiator shall be operated at its maximum
available output power level.

(3) Manufacturers shall supply a list of acceptable antenna types with the
application for equipment authorization of the intentional radiator.

(4) Any antenna that is of the same type and of equal or less directional
gain as an antenna that is authorized with the intentional radiator may be
marketed with, and used with, that intentional radiator. No retesting of
this system configuration is required. The marketing or use of a system
configuration that employs an antenna of a different type, or that operates
at a higher gain, than the antenna authorized with the intentional radiator
is not permitted unless the procedures specified in §2.1043 of this chapter
are followed.

(d) Except as described in this paragraph, an external radio frequency power
amplifier or amplifier kit shall be marketed only with the system
configuration with which it was approved and not as a separate product.

(1) An external radio frequency power amplifier may be marketed for
individual sale provided it is intended for use in conjunction with a
transmitter that operates in the 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, and 5725–5850
MHz bands pursuant to §15.247 of this part or a transmitter that operates in
the 5.725–5.825 GHz band pursuant to §15.407 of this part. The amplifier
must be of a design such that it can only be connected as part of a system
in which it has been previously authorized. (The use of a non-standard
connector or a form of electronic system identification is acceptable.) The
output power of such an amplifier must not exceed the maximum permitted
output power of its associated transmitter.

(2) The outside packaging and user manual for external radio frequency power
amplifiers sold in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section must
include notification that the amplifier can be used only in a system which
it has obtained authorization. Such a notice must identify the authorized
system by FCC Identifier.

[ 69 FR 54034 , Sept. 7, 2004]

§ 15.205 Restricted bands of operation.

top

(a) Except as shown in paragraph (d) of this section, only spurious
emissions are permitted in any of the frequency bands listed below:
MHz MHz MHz GHz
0.090–0.110 16.42–16.423 399.9–410 4.5–5.15
^10.495–0.505 16.69475–16.69525 608–614 5.35–5.46
2.1735–2.1905 16.80425–16.80475 960–1240 7.25–7.75
4.125–4.128 25.5–25.67 1300–1427 8.025–8.5
4.17725–4.17775 37.5–38.25 1435–1626.5 9.0–9.2
4.20725–4.20775 73–74.6 1645.5–1646.5 9.3–9.5
6.215–6.218 74.8–75.2 1660–1710 10.6–12.7
6.26775–6.26825 108–121.94 1718.8–1722.2 13.25–13.4
6.31175–6.31225 123–138 2200–2300 14.47–14.5
8.291–8.294 149.9–150.05 2310–2390 15.35–16.2
8.362–8.366 156.52475–156.52525 2483.5–2500 17.7–21.4
8.37625–8.38675 156.7–156.9 2690–2900 22.01–23.12
8.41425–8.41475 162.0125–167.17 3260–3267 23.6–24.0
12.29–12.293 167.72–173.2 3332–3339 31.2–31.8
12.51975–12.52025 240–285 3345.8–3358 36.43–36.5
12.57675–12.57725 322–335.4 3600–4400 (^2)
13.36–13.41

^1Until February 1, 1999, this restricted band shall be 0.490–0.510 MHz.

^2Above 38.6

(b) Except as provided in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section, the field
strength of emissions appearing within these frequency bands shall not
exceed the limits shown in §15.209. At frequencies equal to or less than
1000 MHz, compliance with the limits in §15.209 shall be demonstrated using
measurement instrumentation employing a CISPR quasi-peak detector. Above
1000 MHz, compliance with the emission limits in §15.209 shall be
demonstrated based on the average value of the measured emissions. The
provisions in §15.35 apply to these measurements.

(c) Except as provided in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section, regardless
of the field strength limits specified elsewhere in this subpart, the
provisions of this section apply to emissions from any intentional radiator.

(d) The following devices are exempt from the requirements of this section:

(1) Swept frequency field disturbance sensors operating between 1.705 and 37
MHz provided their emissions only sweep through the bands listed in
paragraph (a) of this section, the sweep is never stopped with the
fundamental emission within the bands listed in paragraph (a) of this
section, and the fundamental emission is outside of the bands listed in
paragraph (a) of this section more than 99% of the time the device is
actively transmitting, without compensation for duty cycle.

(2) Transmitters used to detect buried electronic markers at 101.4 kHz which
are employed by telephone companies.

(3) Cable locating equipment operated pursuant to §15.213.

(4) Any equipment operated under the provisions of §§15.253, 15.255 or
15.257.

(5) Biomedical telemetry devices operating under the provisions of §15.242
of this part are not subject to the restricted band 608–614 MHz but are
subject to compliance within the other restricted bands.

(6) Transmitters operating under the provisions of subparts D or F of this
part.

(7) Devices operated pursuant to §15.225 are exempt from complying with this
section for the 13.36–13.41 MHz band only.

(8) Devices operated in the 24.075–24.175 GHz band under §15.245 are exempt
from complying with the requirements of this section for the 48.15–48.35 GHz
and 72.225–72.525 GHz bands only, and shall not exceed the limits specified
in §15.245(b).

(9) Devices operated in the 24.0–24.25 GHz band under §15.249 are exempt
from complying with the requirements of this section for the 48.0–48.5 GHz
and 72.0–72.75 GHz bands only, and shall not exceed the limits specified in
§15.249(a).

(e) Harmonic emissions appearing in the restricted bands above 17.7 GHz from
field disturbance sensors operating under the provisions of §15.245 shall
not exceed the limits specified in §15.245(b).

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 46791 , Nov. 7, 1990; 56 FR 6288 , Feb. 15, 1991; 57 FR 13048 , Apr. 15, 1992; 58 FR 33774 , June 21, 1993;
60 FR 28068 , May 30, 1995; 61 FR 14503 , Apr. 2, 1996; 62 FR 4655 , Jan. 31,
1997; 62 FR 58658 , Oct. 30, 1997; 67 FR 34855 , May 16, 2002; 68 FR 68546 ,
Dec. 9, 2003; 69 FR 3265 , Jan. 23, 2004; 69 FR 72031 , Dec. 10, 2004]

§ 15.207 Conducted limits.

top

(a) Except as shown in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, for an
intentional radiator that is designed to be connected to the public utility
(AC) power line, the radio frequency voltage that is conducted back onto the
AC power line on any frequency or frequencies, within the band 150 kHz to 30
MHz, shall not exceed the limits in the following table, as measured using a
50 μH/50 ohms line impedance stabilization network (LISN). Compliance with
the provisions of this paragraph shall be based on the measurement of the
radio frequency voltage between each power line and ground at the power
terminal. The lower limit applies at the boundary between the frequency
ranges.
Frequency of emission (MHz) Conducted limit (dBμV)
Quasi-peak Average
0.15–0.5 66 to 56* 56 to 46*
0.5–5 56 46
5–30 60 50

*Decreases with the logarithm of the frequency.

(b) The limit shown in paragraph (a) of this section shall not apply to
carrier current systems operating as intentional radiators on frequencies
below 30 MHz. In lieu thereof, these carrier current systems shall be
subject to the following standards:

(1) For carrier current system containing their fundamental emission within
the frequency band 535–1705 kHz and intended to be received using a standard
AM broadcast receiver: no limit on conducted emissions.

(2) For all other carrier current systems: 1000 μV within the frequency band
535–1705 kHz, as measured using a 50 μH/50 ohms LISN.

(3) Carrier current systems operating below 30 MHz are also subject to the
radiated emission limits in §15.205, §15.209, §15.221, §15.223, or §15.227,
as appropriate.

(c) Measurements to demonstrate compliance with the conducted limits are not
required for devices which only employ battery power for operation and which
do not operate from the AC power lines or contain provisions for operation
while connected to the AC power lines. Devices that include, or make
provisions for, the use of battery chargers which permit operating while
charging, AC adapters or battery eliminators or that connect to the AC power
lines indirectly, obtainig their power through another device which is
connected to the AC power lines, shall be tested to demonstrate compliance
with the conducted limits.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 56 FR 373 , Jan. 4, 1991; 57 FR 33448 , July 29, 1992; 58 FR 51249 , Oct. 1, 1993; 67 FR 45671 , July 10, 2002]

§ 15.209 Radiated emission limits; general requirements.

top

(a) Except as provided elsewhere in this subpart, the emissions from an
intentional radiator shall not exceed the field strength levels specified in
the following table:
Frequency (MHz) Field strength (microvolts/meter) Measurement distance
(meters)
0.009–0.490 2400/F(kHz) 300
0.490–1.705 24000/F(kHz) 30
1.705–30.0 30 30
30–88 100** 3
88–216 150** 3
216–960 200** 3
Above 960 500 3

**Except as provided in paragraph (g), fundamental emissions from
intentional radiators operating under this section shall not be located in
the frequency bands 54–72 MHz, 76–88 MHz, 174–216 MHz or 470–806 MHz.
However, operation within these frequency bands is permItted under other
sections of this part, e.g., §§15.231 and 15.241.

(b) In the emission table above, the tighter limit applies at the band
edges.

(c) The level of any unwanted emissions from an intentional radiator
operating under these general provisions shall not exceed the level of the
fundamental emission. For intentional radiators which operate under the
provisions of other sections within this part and which are required to
reduce their unwanted emissions to the limits specified in this table, the
limits in this table are based on the frequency of the unwanted emission and
not the fundamental frequency. However, the level of any unwanted emissions
shall not exceed the level of the fundamental frequency.

(d) The emission limits shown in the above table are based on measurements
employing a CISPR quasi-peak detector except for the frequency bands 9–90
kHz, 110–490 kHz and above 1000 MHz. Radiated emission limits in these three
bands are based on measurements employing an average detector.

(e) The provisions in §§15.31, 15.33, and 15.35 for measuring emissions at
distances other than the distances specified in the above table, determining
the frequency range over which radiated emissions are to be measured, and
limiting peak emissions apply to all devices operated under this part.

(f) In accordance with §15.33(a), in some cases the emissions from an
intentional radiator must be measured to beyond the tenth harmonic of the
highest fundamental frequency designed to be emitted by the intentional
radiator because of the incorporation of a digital device. If measurements
above the tenth harmonic are so required, the radiated emissions above the
tenth harmonic shall comply with the general radiated emission limits
applicable to the incorporated digital device, as shown in §15.109 and as
based on the frequency of the emission being measured, or, except for
emissions contained in the restricted frequency bands shown in §15.205, the
limit on spurious emissions specified for the intentional radiator,
whichever is the higher limit. Emissions which must be measured above the
tenth harmonic of the highest fundamental frequency designed to be emitted
by the intentional radiator and which fall within the restricted bands shall
comply with the general radiated emission limits in §15.109 that are
applicable to the incorporated digital device.

(g) Perimeter protection systems may operate in the 54–72 MHz and 76–88 MHz
bands under the provisions of this section. The use of such perimeter
protection systems is limited to industrial, business and commercial
applications.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989; 54 FR 32339 , Aug. 7, 1989; 55 FR 18340 , May 2,
1990; 62 FR 58658 , Oct. 30, 1997]

§ 15.211 Tunnel radio systems.

top

An intentional radiator utilized as part of a tunnel radio system may
operate on any frequency provided it meets all of the following conditions:

(a) Operation of a tunnel radio system (intentional radiator and all
connecting wires) shall be contained solely within a tunnel, mine or other
structure that provides attenuation to the radiated signal due to the
presence of naturally surrounding earth and/or water.

(b) Any intentional or unintentional radiator external to the tunnel, mine
or other structure, as described in paragraph (a) of this section, shall be
subject to the other applicable regulations contained within this part.

(c) The total electromagnetic field from a tunnel radio system on any
frequency or frequencies appearing outside of the tunnel, mine or other
structure described in paragraph (a) of this section, shall not exceed the
limits shown in §15.209 when measured at the specified distance from the
surrounding structure, including openings. Particular attention shall be
paid to the emissions from any opening in the structure to the outside
environment. When measurements are made from the openings, the distances
shown in §15.209 refer to the distance from the plane of reference which
fits the entire perimeter of each above ground opening.

(d) The conducted limits in §15.207 apply to the radiofrequency voltage on
the public utility power lines outside of the tunnel.

§ 15.212 Modular transmitters.

top

(a) Single modular transmitters consist of a completely self-contained
radiofrequency transmitter device that is typically incorporated into
another product, host or device. Split modular transmitters consist of two
components: a radio front end with antenna (or radio devices) and a
transmitter control element (or specific hardware on which the software that
controls the radio operation resides). All single or split modular
transmitters are approved with an antenna. All of the following requirements
apply, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section.

(1) Single modular transmitters must meet the following requirements to
obtain a modular transmitter approval.

(i) The radio elements of the modular transmitter must have their own
shielding. The physical crystal and tuning capacitors may be located
external to the shielded radio elements.

(ii) The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs (if
such inputs are provided) to ensure that the module will comply with part 15
requirements under conditions of excessive data rates or over-modulation.

(iii) The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation.

(iv) The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna and transmission
system requirements of §§15.203, 15.204(b) and 15.204(c). The antenna must
either be permanently attached or employ a “unique” antenna coupler (at all
connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable). The
“professional installation” provision of §15.203 is not applicable to
modules but can apply to limited modular approvals under paragraph (b) of
this section.

(v) The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration,
i.e. , the module must not be inside another device during testing for
compliance with part 15 requirements. Unless the transmitter module will be
battery powered, it must comply with the AC line conducted requirements
found in §15.207. AC or DC power lines and data input/output lines connected
to the module must not contain ferrites, unless they will be marketed with
the module (see §15.27(a)). The length of these lines shall be the length
typical of actual use or, if that length is unknown, at least 10 centimeters
to insure that there is no coupling between the case of the module and
supporting equipment. Any accessories, peripherals, or support equipment
connected to the module during testing shall be unmodified and commercially
available (see §15.31(i)).

(vi) The modular transmitter must be equipped with either a permanently
affixed label or must be capable of electronically displaying its FCC
identification number.

(A) If using a permanently affixed label, the modular transmitter must be
labeled with its own FCC identification number, and, if the FCC
identification number is not visible when the module is installed inside
another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is
installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. This
exterior label can use wording such as the following: “Contains Transmitter
Module FCC ID: XYZMODEL1” or “Contains FCC ID: XYZMODEL1.” Any similar
wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The Grantee may either
provide such a label, an example of which must be included in the
application for equipment authorization, or, must provide adequate
instructions along with the module which explain this requirement. In the
latter case, a copy of these instructions must be included in the
application for equipment authorization.

(B) If the modular transmitter uses an electronic display of the FCC
identification number, the information must be readily accessible and
visible on the modular transmitter or on the device in which it is
installed. If the module is installed inside another device, then the
outside of the device into which the module is installed must display a
label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording
such as the following: “Contains FCC certified transmitter module(s).” Any
similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The user manual
must include instructions on how to access the electronic display. A copy of
these instructions must be included in the application for equipment
authorization.

(vii) The modular transmitter must comply with any specific rules or
operating requirements that ordinarily apply to a complete transmitter and
the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to
explain any such requirements. A copy of these instructions must be included
in the application for equipment authorization.

(viii) The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure
requirements in its final configuration.

(2) Split modular transmitters must meet the requirements in paragraph
(a)(1) of this section, excluding paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (a)(1)(v), and
the following additional requirements to obtain a modular transmitter
approval.

(i) Only the radio front end must be shielded. The physical crystal and
tuning capacitors may be located external to the shielded radio elements.
The interface between the split sections of the modular system must be
digital with a minimum signaling amplitude of 150 mV peak-to-peak.

(ii) Control information and other data may be exchanged between the
transmitter control elements and radio front end.

(iii) The sections of a split modular transmitter must be tested installed
in a host device(s) similar to that which is representative of the
platform(s) intended for use.

(iv) Manufacturers must ensure that only transmitter control elements and
radio front end components that have been approved together are capable of
operating together. The transmitter module must not operate unless it has
verified that the installed transmitter control elements and radio front end
have been authorized together. Manufacturers may use means including, but
not limited to, coding in hardware and electronic signatures in software to
meet these requirements, and must describe the methods in their application
for equipment authorization.

(b) A limited modular approval may be granted for single or split modular
transmitters that do not comply with all of the above requirements, e.g. ,
shielding, minimum signaling amplitude, buffered modulation/data inputs, or
power supply regulation, if the manufacturer can demonstrate by alternative
means in the application for equipment authorization that the modular
transmitter meets all the applicable part 15 requirements under the
operating conditions in which the transmitter will be used. Limited modular
approval also may be granted in those instances where compliance with RF
exposure rules is demonstrated only for particular product configurations.
The applicant for certification must state how control of the end product
into which the module will be installed will be maintained such that full
compliance of the end product is always ensured.

[ 72 FR 28893 , May 23, 2007]

Effective Date Note: At 72 FR 28893 , May 23, 2007, § 15.212 was added.
This section contains information collection and recordkeeping requirements
and will not become effective until approval has been given by the Office of
Management and Budget.

§ 15.213 Cable locating equipment.

top

An intentional radiator used as cable locating equipment, as defined in
§15.3(d), may be operated on any frequency within the band 9–490 kHz,
subject to the following limits: Within the frequency band 9 kHz, up to, but
not including, 45 kHz, the peak output power from the cable locating
equipment shall not exceed 10 watts; and, within the frequency band 45 kHz
to 490 kHz, the peak output power from the cable locating equipment shall
not exceed one watt. If provisions are made for connection of the cable
locating equipment to the AC power lines, the conducted limits in §15.207
also apply to this equipment.

§ 15.214 Cordless telephones.

top

(a) For equipment authorization, a single application form, FCC Form 731,
may be filed for a cordless telephone system, provided the application
clearly identifies and provides data for all parts of the system to show
compliance with the applicable technical requirements. When a single
application form is submitted, both the base station and the portable
handset must carry the same FCC identifier. The application shall include a
fee for certification of each type of transmitter and for certification, if
appropriate, for each type of receiver included in the system.

(b) A cordless telephone that is intended to be connected to the public
switched telephone network shall also comply with the applicable regulations
in part 68 of this chapter. A separate procedure for approval under part 68
is required for such terminal equipment.

(c) The label required under subpart A of this part shall also contain the
following statement: “Privacy of communications may not be ensured when
using this phone.”

(d) Cordless telephones shall incorporate circuitry which makes use of a
digital security code to provide protection against unintentional access to
the public switched telephone network by the base unit and unintentional
ringing by the handset. These functions shall operate such that each access
of the telephone network or ringing of the handset is preceded by the
transmission of a code word. Access to the telephone network shall occur
only if the code transmitted by the handset matches code set in the base
unit. Similarly, ringing of the handset shall occur only if the code
transmitted by the base unit matches the code set in the handset. The
security code required by this section may also be employed to perform other
communications functions, such as providing telephone billing information.
This security code system is to operate in accordance with the following
provisions.

(1) There must be provision for at least 256 possible discrete digital
codes. Factory-set codes must be continuously varied over at least 256
possible codes as each telephone is manufactured. The codes may be varied
either randomly, sequentially, or using another systematic procedure.

(2) Manufacturers must use one of the following approaches for facilitating
variation in the geographic distribution of individual security codes:

(i) Provide a means for the user to readily select from among at least 256
possible discrete digital codes. The cordless telephone shall be either in a
non-operable mode after manufacture until the user selects a security code
or the manufacturer must continuously vary the initial security code as each
telephone is produced.

(ii) Provide a fixed code that is continuously varied among at least 256
discrete digital codes as each telephone is manufactured.

(iii) Provide a means for the cordless telephone to automatically select a
different code from among at least 256 possible discrete digital codes each
time it is activated.

(iv) It is permissible to provide combinations of fixed, automatic, and
user-selectable coding provided the above criteria are met.

(3) A statement of the means and procedures used to achieve the required
protection shall be provided in any application for equipment authorization
of a cordless telephone.

[ 56 FR 3785 , Jan. 31, 1991, as amended at 63 FR 36603 , July 7, 1998; 66 FR 7580 , Jan. 24, 2001]

Radiated Emission Limits, Additional Provisions

top

§ 15.215 Additional provisions to the general radiated emission limitations.

top

(a) The regulations in §§15.217 through 15.257 provide alternatives to the
general radiated emission limits for intentional radiators operating in
specified frequency bands. Unless otherwise stated, there are no
restrictions as to the types of operation permitted under these sections.

(b) In most cases, unwanted emissions outside of the frequency bands shown
in these alternative provisions must be attenuated to the emission limits
shown in §15.209. In no case shall the level of the unwanted emissions from
an intentional radiator operating under these additional provisions exceed
the field strength of the fundamental emission.

(c) Intentional radiators operating under the alternative provisions to the
general emission limits, as contained in §§15.217 through 15.257 and in
Subpart E of this part, must be designed to ensure that the 20 dB bandwidth
of the emission, or whatever bandwidth may otherwise be specified in the
specific rule section under which the equipment operates, is contained
within the frequency band designated in the rule section under which the
equipment is operated. The requirement to contain the designated bandwidth
of the emission within the specified frequency band includes the effects
from frequency sweeping, frequency hopping and other modulation techniques
that may be employed as well as the frequency stability of the transmitter
over expected variations in temperature and supply voltage. If a frequency
stability is not specified in the regulations, it is recommended that the
fundamental emission be kept within at least the central 80% of the
permitted band in order to minimize the possibility of out-of-band
operation.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 62 FR 45333 , Aug. 27, 1997; 67 FR 34855 , May 16, 2002; 69 FR 3265 , Jan. 23, 2004; 70 FR 6774 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.217 Operation in the band 160–190 kHz.

top

(a) The total input power to the final radio frequency stage (exclusive of
filament or heater power) shall not exceed one watt.

(b) The total length of the transmission line, antenna, and ground lead (if
used) shall not exceed 15 meters.

(c) All emissions below 160 kHz or above 190 kHz shall be attenuated at
least 20 dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier. Determination of
compliance with the 20 dB attenuation specification may be based on
measurements at the intentional radiator's antenna output terminal unless
the intentional radiator uses a permanently attached antenna, in which case
compliance shall be demonstrated by measuring the radiated emissions.

§ 15.219 Operation in the band 510–1705 kHz.

top

(a) The total input power to the final radio frequency stage (exclusive of
filament or heater power) shall not exceed 100 milliwatts.

(b) The total length of the transmission line, antenna and ground lead (if
used) shall not exceed 3 meters.

(c) All emissions below 510 kHz or above 1705 kHz shall be attenuated at
least 20 dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier. Determination of
compliance with the 20 dB attenuation specification may be based on
measurements at the intentional radiator's antenna output terminal unless
the intentional radiator uses a permanently attached antenna, in which case
compliance shall be deomonstrated by measuring the radiated emissions.

§ 15.221 Operation in the band 525–1705 kHz.

top

(a) Carrier current systems and transmitters employing a leaky coaxial cable
as the radiating antenna may operate in the band 525–1705 kHz provided the
field strength levels of the radiated emissions do not exceed 15 uV/m, as
measured at a distance of 47,715/(frequency in kHz) meters (equivalent to
Lambda/2Pi) from the electric power line or the coaxial cable, respectively.
The field strength levels of emissions outside this band shall not exceed
the general radiated emission limits in §15.209.

(b) As an alternative to the provisions in paragraph (a) of this section,
intentional radiators used for the operation of an AM broadcast station on a
college or university campus or on the campus of any other education
institution may comply with the following:

(1) On the campus, the field strength of emissions appearing outside of this
frequency band shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits shown
in §15.209 as measured from the radiating source. There is no limit on the
field strength of emissions appearing within this frequency band, except
that the provisions of §15.5 continue to comply.

(2) At the perimeter of the campus, the field strength of any emissions,
including those within the frequency band 525–1705 kHz, shall not exceed the
general radiated emission in §15.209.

(3) The conducted limits specified in §15.207 apply to the radio frequency
voltage on the public utility power lines outside of the campus. Due to the
large number of radio frequency devices which may be used on the campus,
contributing to the conducted emissions, as an alternative to measuring
conducted emissions outside of the campus, it is acceptable to demonstrate
compliance with this provision by measuring each individual intentional
radiator employed in the system at the point where it connects to the AC
power lines.

(c) A grant of equipment authorization is not required for intentional
radiators operated under the provisions of this section. In lieu thereof,
the intentional radiator shall be verified for compliance with the
regulations in accordance with subpart J of part 2 of this chapter. This
data shall be kept on file at the location of the studio, office or control
room associated with the transmitting equipment. In some cases, this may
correspond to the location of the transmitting equipment.

(d) For the band 535–1705 kHz, the frequency of operation shall be chosen
such that operation is not within the protected field strength contours of
licensed AM stations.

[ 56 FR 373 , Jan. 4, 1991]

§ 15.223 Operation in the band 1.705–10 MHz.

top

(a) The field strength of any emission within the band 1.705–10.0 MHz shall
not exceed 100 microvolts/meter at a distance of 30 meters. However, if the
bandwidth of the emission is less than 10% of the center frequency, the
field strength shall not exceed 15 microvolts/meter or (the bandwidth of the
device in kHz) divided by (the center frequency of the device in MHz)
microvolts/meter at a distance of 30 meters, whichever is the higher level.
For the purposes of this section, bandwidth is determined at the points 6 dB
down from the modulated carrier. The emission limits in this paragraph are
based on measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The
provisions in §15.35(b) for limiting peak emissions apply.

(b) The field strength of emissions outside of the band 1.705–10.0 MHz shall
not exceed the general radiated emission limits in §15.209.

§ 15.225 Operation within the band 13.110–14.010 MHz.

top

(a) The field strength of any emissions within the band 13.553–13.567 MHz
shall not exceed 15,848 microvolts/meter at 30 meters.

(b) Within the bands 13.410–13.553 MHz and 13.567–13.710 MHz, the field
strength of any emissions shall not exceed 334 microvolts/meter at 30
meters.

(c) Within the bands 13.110–13.410 MHz and 13.710–14.010 MHz the field
strength of any emissions shall not exceed 106 microvolts/meter at 30
meters.

(d) The field strength of any emissions appearing outside of the
13.110–14.010 MHz band shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits
in §15.209.

(e) The frequency tolerance of the carrier signal shall be maintained within
±0.01% of the operating frequency over a temperature variation of −20
degrees to +50 degrees C at normal supply voltage, and for a variation in
the primary supply voltage from 85% to 115% of the rated supply voltage at a
temperature of 20 degrees C. For battery operated equipment, the equipment
tests shall be performed using a new battery.

(f) In the case of radio frequency powered tags designed to operate with a
device authorized under this section, the tag may be approved with the
device or be considered as a separate device subject to its own
authorization. Powered tags approved with a device under a single
application shall be labeled with the same identification number as the
device.

[ 68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.227 Operation within the band 26.96–27.28 MHz.

top

(a) The field strength of any emission within this band shall not exceed
10,000 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limit in this paragraph is
based on measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The
provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

(b) The field strength of any emissions which appear outside of this band
shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits in §15.209.

§ 15.229 Operation within the band 40.66–40.70 MHz.

top

(a) Unless operating pursuant to the provisions in §15.231, the field
strength of any emissions within this band shall not exceed 1,000
microvolts/meter at 3 meters.

(b) As an alternative to the limit in paragraph (a) of this section,
perimeter protection systems may demonstrate compliance with the following:
the field strength of any emissions within this band shall not exceed 500
microvolts/meter at 3 meters, as determined using measurement
instrumentations employing an average detector. The provisions in §15.35 for
limiting peak emissions apply where compliance of these devices is
demonstrated under this alternative emission limit.

(c) The field strength of any emissions appearing outside of this band shall
not exceed the general radiated emission limits in §15.209.

(d) The frequency tolerance of the carrier signal shall be maintained within
±0.01% of the operating frequency over a temperature variation of −20
degrees to +50 degrees C at normal supply voltage, and for a variation in
the primary supply voltage from 85% to 115% of the rated supply voltage at a
temperature of 20 degrees C. For battery operated equipment, the equipment
tests shall be performed using a new battery.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 33910 , Aug. 20, 1990]

§ 15.231 Periodic operation in the band 40.66–40.70 MHz and above 70 MHz.

top

(a) The provisions of this section are restricted to periodic operation
within the band 40.66–40.70 MHz and above 70 MHz. Except as shown in
paragraph (e) of this section, the intentional radiator is restricted to the
transmission of a control signal such as those used with alarm systems, door
openers, remote switches, etc. Continuous transmissions, voice, video and
the radio control of toys are not permitted. Data is permitted to be sent
with a control signal. The following conditions shall be met to comply with
the provisions for this periodic operation:

(1) A manually operated transmitter shall employ a switch that will
automatically deactivate the transmitter within not more than 5 seconds of
being released.

(2) A transmitter activated automatically shall cease transmission within 5
seconds after activation.

(3) Periodic transmissions at regular predetermined intervals are not
permitted. However, polling or supervision transmissions, including data, to
determine system integrity of transmitters used in security or safety
applications are allowed if the total duration of transmissions does not
exceed more than two seconds per hour for each transmitter. There is no
limit on the number of individual transmissions, provided the total
transmission time does not exceed two seconds per hour.

(4) Intentional radiators which are employed for radio control purposes
during emergencies involving fire, security, and safety of life, when
activated to signal an alarm, may operate during the pendency of the alarm
condition

(5) Transmission of set-up information for security systems may exceed the
transmission duration limits in paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this
section, provided such transmissions are under the control of a professional
installer and do not exceed ten seconds after a manually operated switch is
released or a transmitter is activated automatically. Such set-up
information may include data.

(b) In addition to the provisions of §15.205, the field strength of
emissions from intentional radiators operated under this section shall not
exceed the following:
Fundamental frequency (MHz) Field strength of fundamental (microvolts/meter)
Field strength of spurious emissions (microvolts/meter)
40.66–40.70 2,250 225
70–130 1,250 125
130–174 ^11,250 to 3,750 ^1125 to 375
174–260 3,750 375
260–470 ^13,750 to 12,500 ^1375 to 1,250
Above 470 12,500 1,250

^1Linear interpolations.

(1) The above field strength limits are specified at a distance of 3 meters.
The tighter limits apply at the band edges.

(2) Intentional radiators operating under the provisions of this section
shall demonstrate compliance with the limits on the field strength of
emissions, as shown in the above table, based on the average value of the
measured emissions. As an alternative, compliance with the limits in the
above table may be based on the use of measurement instrumentation with a
CISPR quasi-peak detector. The specific method of measurement employed shall
be specified in the application for equipment authorization. If average
emission measurements are employed, the provisions in §15.35 for averaging
pulsed emissions and for limiting peak emissions apply. Further, compliance
with the provisions of §15.205 shall be demonstrated using the measurement
instrumentation specified in that section.

(3) The limits on the field strength of the spurious emissions in the above
table are based on the fundamental frequency of the intentional radiator.
Spurious emissions shall be attenuated to the average (or, alternatively,
CISPR quasi-peak) limits shown in this table or to the general limits shown
in §15.209, whichever limit permits a higher field strength.

(c) The bandwidth of the emission shall be no wider than 0.25% of the center
frequency for devices operating above 70 MHz and below 900 MHz. For devices
operating above 900 MHz, the emission shall be no wider than 0.5% of the
center frequency. Bandwidth is determined at the points 20 dB down from the
modulated carrier.

(d) For devices operating within the frequency band 40.66–40.70 MHz, the
bandwidth of the emission shall be confined within the band edges and the
frequency tolerance of the carrier shall be ±0.01%. This frequency tolerance
shall be maintained for a temperature variation of −20 degrees to +50
degrees C at normal supply voltage, and for a variation in the primary
supply voltage from 85% to 115% of the rated supply voltage at a temperature
of 20 degrees C. For battery operated equipment, the equipment tests shall
be performed using a new battery.

(e) Intentional radiators may operate at a periodic rate exceeding that
specified in paragraph (a) of this section and may be employed for any type
of operation, including operation prohibited in paragraph (a) of this
section, provided the intentional radiator complies with the provisions of
paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, except the field strength table
in paragraph (b) of this section is replaced by the following:
Fundamental frequency (MHz) Field strength of fundamental (microvolts/meter)
Field strength of spurious emission (microvolts/meter)
40.66–40.70 1,000 100
70–130 500 50
130–174 500 to 1,500^1 50 to 150^1
174–260 1,500 150
260–470 1,500 to 5,000^1 150 to 500^1
Above 470 5,000 500

^1Linear interpolations.

In addition, devices operated under the provisions of this paragraph shall
be provided with a means for automatically limiting operation so that the
duration of each transmission shall not be greater than one second and the
silent period between transmissions shall be at least 30 times the duration
of the transmission but in no case less than 10 seconds.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989; 54 FR 32340 , Aug. 7, 1989, as amended at 68 FR 68546 , Dec. 9, 2003; 69 FR 71383 , Dec. 9, 2004]

§ 15.233 Operation within the bands 43.71–44.49 MHz, 46.60–46.98 MHz,
48.75–49.51 MHz and 49.66–50.0 MHz.

top

(a) The provisions shown in this section are restricted to cordless
telephones.

(b) An intentional radiator used as part of a cordless telephone system
shall operate centered on one or more of the following frequency pairs,
subject to the following conditions:

(1) Frequencies shall be paired as shown below, except that channel pairing
for channels one through fifteen may be accomplished by pairing any of the
fifteen base transmitter frequencies with any of the fifteen handset
transmitter frequencies.

(2) Cordless telephones operating on channels one through fifteen must:

(i) Incorporate an automatic channel selection mechanism that will prevent
establishment of a link on any occupied frequency; and

(ii) The box or an instruction manual which is included within the box which
the individual cordless telephone is to be marketed shall contain
information indicating that some cordless telephones operate at frequencies
that may cause interference to nearby TVs and VCRs; to minimize or prevent
such interference, the base of the cordless telephone should not be placed
near or on top of a TV or VCR; and, if interference is experienced, moving
the cordless telephone farther away from the TV or VCR will often reduce or
eliminate the interference. A statement describing the means and procedures
used to achieve automatic channel selection shall be provided in any
application for equipment authorization of a cordless telephone operating on
channels one through fifteen.
Channel Base transmitter (MHz) Handset transmitter (MHz)
1 43.720 48.760
2 43.740 48.840
3 43.820 48.860
4 43.840 48.920
5 43.920 49.020
6 43.960 49.080
7 44.120 49.100
8 44.160 49.160
9 44.180 49.200
10 44.200 49.240
11 44.320 49.280
12 44.360 49.360
13 44.400 49.400
14 44.460 49.460
15 44.480 49.500
16 46.610 49.670
17 46.630 49.845
18 46.670 49.860
19 46.710 49.770
20 46.730 49.875
21 46.770 49.830
22 46.830 49.890
23 46.870 49.930
24 46.930 49.990
25 46.970 49.970

(c) The field strength of the fundamental emission shall not exceed 10,000
microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limit in this paragraph is based
on measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The provisions
in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

(d) The fundamental emission shall be confined within a 20 kHz band and
shall be centered on a carrier frequency shown above, as adjusted by the
frequency tolerance of the transmitter at the time testing is performed.
Modulation products outside of this 20 kHz band shall be attenuated at least
26 dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier or to the general limits in
§15.209, whichever permits the higher emission levels. Emissions on any
frequency more than 20 kHz removed from the center frequency shall consist
solely of unwanted emissions and shall not exceed the general radiated
emission limits in §15.209. Tests to determine compliance with these
requirements shall be performed using an appropriate input signal as
prescribed in §2.989 of this chapter.

(e) All emissions exceeding 20 microvolts/meter at 3 meters are to be
reported in the application for certification.

(f) If the device provides for the connection of external accessories,
including external electrical input signals, the device must be tested with
the accessories attached. The emission tests shall be performed with the
device and accessories configured in a manner which tends to produce the
maximum level of emissions within the range of variations that can be
expected under normal operating conditions.

(g) The frequency tolerance of the carrier signal shall be maintained within
±0.01% of the operating frequency. The tolerance shall be maintained for a
temperature variation of −20 degrees C to +50 degrees C at normal supply
voltage, and for variation in the primary voltage from 85% to 115% of the
rated supply voltage at a temperature of 20 degrees C. For battery operated
equipment, the equipment tests shall be performed using a new battery.

(h) For cordless telephones that do not comply with §15.214(d) of this part,
the box or other package in which the individual cordless telephone is to be
marketed shall carry a statement in a prominent location, visible to the
buyer before purchase, which reads as follows:

Notice:The base units of some cordless telephones may respond to other
nearby units or to radio noise resulting in telephone calls being dialed
through this unit without your knowledge and possibly calls being misbilled.
In order to protect against such occurrences, this cordless telephone is
provided with the following features: (to be completed by the responsible
party).

An application for certification of a cordless telephone shall specify the
complete text of the statement that will be carried on the package and
indicate where, specifically, it will be located on the carton.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989; 54 FR 32340 , Aug. 7, 1989, as amended at 56 FR 3785 , Jan. 31, 1991; 56 FR 5659 , Feb. 12, 1991; 60 FR 21985 , May 4, 1995]

§ 15.235 Operation within the band 49.82–49.90 MHz.

top

(b) The field strength of any emissions appearing between the band edges and
up to 10 kHz above and below the band edges shall be attenuated at least 26
dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier or to the general limits in
§15.209, whichever permits the higher emission levels. The field strength of
any emissions removed by more than 10 kHz from the band edges shall not
exceed the general radiated emission limits in §15.209. All signals
exceeding 20 microvolts/meter at 3 meters shall be reported in the
application for certification.

(c) For a home-built intentional radiator, as defined in §15.23(a),
operating within the band 49.82–49.90 MHz, the following standards may be
employed:

(1) The RF carrier and modulation products shall be maintained within the
band 49.82–49.90 MHz.

(2) The total input power to the device measured at the battery or the power
line terminals shall not exceed 100 milliwatts under any condition of
modulation.

(3) The antenna shall be a single element, one meter or less in length,
permanently mounted on the enclosure containing the device.

(4) Emissions outside of this band shall be attenuated at least 20 dB below
the level of the unmodulated carrier.

(5) The regulations contained in §15.23 of this part apply to intentional
radiators constructed under the provisions of this paragraph.

(d) Cordless telephones are not permitted to operate under the provisions of
this section.

§ 15.237 Operation in the bands 72.0–73.0 MHz, 74.6–74.8 MHz and 75.2–76.0
MHz.

top

(a) The intentional radiator shall be restricted to use as an auditory
assistance device.

(b) Emissions from the intentional radiator shall be confined within a band
200 kHz wide centered on the operating frequency. The 200 kHz band shall lie
wholly within the above specified frequency ranges.

(c) The field strength of any emissions within the permitted 200 kHz band
shall not exceed 80 millivolts/meter at 3 meters. The field strength of any
emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the specified 200 kHz band
shall not exceed 1500 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limits in
this paragraph are based on measurement instrumentation employing an average
detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 57 FR 13048 , Apr. 15, 1992]

§ 15.239 Operation in the band 88–108 MHz.

top

(a) Emissions from the intentional radiator shall be confined within a band
200 kHz wide centered on the operating frequency. The 200 kHz band shall lie
wholly within the frequency range of 88–108 MHz.

(b) The field strength of any emissions within the permitted 200 kHz band
shall not exceed 250 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission limit in
this paragraph is based on measurement instrumentation employing an average
detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

(c) The field strength of any emissions radiated on any frequency outside of
the specified 200 kHz band shall not exceed the general radiated emission
limits in §15.209.

(d) A custom built telemetry intentional radiator operating in the frequency
band 88–108 MHz and used for experimentation by an educational institute
need not be certified provided the device complies with the standards in
this part and the educational institution notifies the Engineer in Charge of
the local FCC office, in writing, in advance of operation, providing the
following information:

(1) The dates and places where the device will be operated;

(2) The purpose for which the device will be used;

(3) A description of the device, including the operating frequency, RF power
output, and antenna; and,

(4) A statement that the device complies with the technical provisions of
this part.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989; 54 FR 32340 , Aug. 7, 1989]

§ 15.240 Operation in the band 433.5–434.5 MHz.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this section is restricted to devices
that use radio frequency energy to identify the contents of commercial
shipping containers. Operations must be limited to commercial and industrial
areas such as ports, rail terminals and warehouses. Two-way operation is
permitted to interrogate and to load data into devices. Devices operated
pursuant to the provisions of this section shall not be used for voice
communications.

(b) The field strength of any emissions radiated within the specified
frequency band shall not exceed 11,000 microvolts per meter measured at a
distance of 3 meters. The emission limit in this paragraph is based on
measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The peak level of
any emissions within the specified frequency band shall not exceed 55,000
microvolts per meter measured at a distance of 3 meters. Additionally,
devices authorized under these provisions shall be provided with a means for
automatically limiting operation so that the duration of each transmission
shall not be greater than 60 seconds and be only permitted to reinitiate an
interrogation in the case of a transmission error. Absent such a
transmission error, the silent period between transmissions shall not be
less than 10 seconds.

(c) The field strength of emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the
specified band shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits in
§15.209.

(d) In the case of radio frequency powered tags designed to operate with a
device authorized under this section, the tag may be approved with the
device or be considered as a separate device subject to its own
authorization. Powered tags approved with a device under a single
application shall be labeled with the same identification number as the
device.

(e) To prevent interference to Federal Government radar systems, operation
under the provisions of this section is not permitted within 40 kilometers
of the following locations:
DoD Radar Site Latitude Longitude
Beale Air Force Base 39°08'10" N 121°21'04" W
Cape Cod Air Force Station 41°45'07" N 070°32'17" W
Clear Air Force Station 64°55'16" N 143°05'02" W
Cavalier Air Force Station 48°43'12" N 097°54'00" W
Eglin Air Force Base 30°43'12" N 086°12'36" W

(f) As a condition of the grant, the grantee of an equipment authorization
for a device operating under the provisions of this section shall provide
information to the user concerning compliance with the operational
restrictions in paragraphs (a) and (e) of this section. As a further
condition, the grantee shall provide information on the locations where the
devices are installed to the FCC Office of Engineering and Technology, which
shall provide this information to the Federal Government through the
National Telecommunications and Information Administration. The user of the
device shall be responsible for submitting updated information in the event
the operating location or other information changes after the initial
registration. The grantee shall notify the user of this requirement. The
information provided by the grantee or user to the Commission shall include
the name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the user, the
address and geographic coordinates of the operating location, and the FCC
identification number of the device. The material shall be submitted to the
following address:

Experimental Licensing Branch, OET, Federal Communications Commission, 445
12th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20554, ATTN: RFID Registration.

[ 69 FR 29464 , May 24, 2004]

§ 15.241 Operation in the band 174–216 MHz.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this section is restricted to
biomedical telemetry devices.

(b) Emissions from the device shall be confined within a 200 kHz band which
shall lie wholly within the frequency range of 174–216 MHz.

(c) The field strength of any emissions radiated within the specified 200
kHz band shall not exceed 1500 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The field
strength of emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the specified 200
kHz band shall not exceed 150 microvolts/meter at 3 meters. The emission
limits in this paragraph are based on measurement instrumentation employing
an average detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak emissions
apply.

§ 15.242 Operation in the bands 174–216 MHz and 470–668 MHz.

top

(a) The marketing and operation of intentional radiators under the
provisions of this section is restricted to biomedical telemetry devices
employed solely on the premises of health care facilities.

(1) A health care facility includes hospitals and other establishments that
offer services, facilities, and beds for use beyond 24 hours in rendering
medical treatment and institutions and organizations regularly engaged in
providing medical services through clinics, public health facilities, and
similar establishments, including governmental entities and agencies for
their own medical activities.

(2) This authority to operate does not extend to mobile vehicles, such as
ambulances, even if those vehicles are associated with a health care
facility.

(b) The fundamental emissions from a biomedical telemetry device operating
under the provisions of this section shall be contained within a single
television broadcast channel, as defined in part 73 of this chapter, under
all conditions of operation and shall lie wholly within the frequency ranges
of 174–216 MHz and 470–668 MHz.

(c) The field strength of the fundamental emissions shall not exceed 200
mV/m, as measured at a distance of 3 meters using a quasi-peak detector.
Manufacturers should note that a quasi-peak detector function indicates
field strength per 120 kHz of bandwidth ±20 kHz. Accordingly, the total
signal level over the band of operation may be higher than 200 mV/m. The
field strength of emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the
television broadcast channel within which the fundamental is contained shall
not exceed the general limits in §15.209.

(d) The user and the installer of a biomedical telemetry device operating
within the frequency range 174–216 MHz, 470–608 MHz or 614–668 MHz shall
ensure that the following minimum separation distances are maintained
between the biomedical telemetry device and the authorized radio services
operating on the same frequencies:

(1) At least 10.3 km outside of the Grade B field strength contour (56
dBuV/m) of a TV broadcast station or an associated TV booster station
operating within the band 174–216 MHz.

(2) At least 5.5 km outside of the Grade B field strength contour (64
dBuV/m) of a TV broadcast station or an associated TV booster station
operating within the bands 470–608 MHz or 614–668 MHz.

(3) At least 5.1 km outside of the 68 dBuV/m field strength contour of a low
power TV or a TV translator station operating within the band 174–216 MHz.

(4) At least 3.1 km outside of the 74 dBuV/m field strength contour of a low
power TV or a TV translator station operating within the bands 470–608 MHz
or 614–668 MHz.

(5) Whatever distance is necessary to protect other authorized users within
these bands.

(e) The user and the installer of a biomedical telemetry device operating
within the frequency range 608–614 MHz and that will be located within 32 km
of the very long baseline array (VLBA) stations or within 80 km of any of
the other radio astronomy observatories noted in footnote US 311 of Section
2.106 of this chapter must coordinate with, and obtain the written
concurrence of, the director of the affected radio astronomy observatory
before the equipment can be installed or operated. The National Science
Foundation point of contact for coordination is: Spectrum Manager, Division
of Astronomical Sciences, NSF Rm 1045, 4201 Wilson Blvd., Arlington, VA
22230; tel: (703) 306–1823.

(f) Biomedical telemetry devices must not cause harmful interference to
licensed TV broadcast stations or to other authorized radio services, such
as operations on the broadcast frequencies under subparts G and H of part 74
of this chapter, land mobile stations operating under part 90 of this
chapter in the 470–512 MHz band, and radio astronomy operation in the
608–614 MHz band. (See §15.5.) If harmful interference occurs, the
interference must either be corrected or the device must immediately cease
operation on the occupied frequency. Further, the operator of the biomedical
telemetry device must accept whatever level of interference is received from
other radio operations. The operator, i.e., the health care facility, is
responsible for resolving any interference that occurs subsequent to the
installation of these devices.

(g) The manufacturers, installers, and users of biomedical telemetry devices
are reminded that they must ensure that biomedical telemetry transmitters
operating under the provisions of this section avoid operating in close
proximity to authorized services using this spectrum. Sufficient separation
distance, necessary to avoid causing or receiving harmful interference, must
be maintained from co-channel operations. These parties are reminded that
the frequencies of the authorized services are subject to change, especially
during the implementation of the digital television services. The operating
frequencies of the part 15 devices may need to be changed, as necessary and
in accordance with the permissive change requirements of this chapter, to
accommodate changes in the operating frequencies of the authorized services.

(h) The manufacturers, installers and users of biomedical telemetry devices
are cautioned that the operation of this equipment could result in harmful
interference to other nearby medical devices.

[ 62 FR 58658 , Oct. 30, 1997]

§ 15.243 Operation in the band 890–940 MHz.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this section is restricted to devices
that use radio frequency energy to measure the characteristics of a
material. Devices operated pursuant to the provisions of this section shall
not be used for voice communications or the transmission of any other type
of message.

(b) The field strength of any emissions radiated within the specified
frequency band shall not exceed 500 microvolts/meter at 30 meters. The
emission limit in this paragraph is based on measurement instrumentation
employing an average detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak
emissions apply.

(c) The field strength of emissions radiated on any frequency outside of the
specified band shall not exceed the general radiated emission limits in
§15.209.

(d) The device shall be self-contained with no external or readily
accessible controls which may be adjusted to permit operation in a manner
inconsistent with the provisions in this section. Any antenna that may be
used with the device shall be permanently attached thereto and shall not be
readily modifiable by the user.

§ 15.245 Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2435–2465 MHz, 5785–5815
MHz, 10500–10550 MHz, and 24075–24175 MHz.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to intentional
radiators used as field disturbance sensors, excluding perimeter protection
systems.

(b) The field strength of emissions from intentional radiators operated
within these frequency bands shall comply with the following:
Fundamental frequency (MHz) Field strength of fundamental (millivolts/meter)
Field strength of harmonics (millivolts/meter)
902–928 500 1.6
2435–2465 500 1.6
5785–5815 500 1.6
10500–10550 2500 25.0
24075–24175 2500 25.0

(1) Regardless of the limits shown in the above table, harmonic emissions in
the restricted bands below 17.7 GHz, as specified in §15.205, shall not
exceed the field strength limits shown in §15.209. Harmonic emissions in the
restricted bands at and above 17.7 GHz shall not exceed the following field
strength limits:

(i) For the second and third harmonics of field disturbance sensors
operating in the 24075–24175 MHz band and for other field disturbance
sensors designed for use only within a building or to open building doors,
25.0 mV/m.

(ii) For all other field disturbance sensors, 7.5 mV/m.

(iii) Field disturbance sensors designed to be used in motor vehicles or
aircraft must include features to prevent continuous operation unless their
emissions in the restricted bands, other than the second and third harmonics
from devices operating in the 24075–24175 MHz band, fully comply with the
limits given in §15.209. Continuous operation of field disturbance sensors
designed to be used in farm equipment, vehicles such as fork lifts that are
intended primarily for use indoors or for very specialized operations, or
railroad locomotives, railroad cars and other equipment which travels on
fixed tracks is permitted. A field disturbance sensor will be considered not
to be operating in a continuous mode if its operation is limited to specific
activities of limited duration (e.g., putting a vehicle into reverse gear,
activating a turn signal, etc.).

(2) Field strength limits are specified at a distance of 3 meters.

(3) Emissions radiated outside of the specified frequency bands, except for
harmonics, shall be attenuated by at least 50 dB below the level of the
fundamental or to the general radiated emission limits in §15.209, whichever
is the lesser attenuation.

(4) The emission limits shown above are based on measurement instrumentation
employing an average detector. The provisions in §15.35 for limiting peak
emissions apply.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 46792 , Nov. 7, 1990; 61 FR 42558 , Aug. 16, 1996; 68 FR 68547 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.247 Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, and
5725–5850 MHz.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this Section is limited to frequency
hopping and digitally modulated intentional radiators that comply with the
following provisions:

(1) Frequency hopping systems shall have hopping channel carrier frequencies
separated by a minimum of 25 kHz or the 20 dB bandwidth of the hopping
channel, whichever is greater. Alternatively, frequency hopping systems
operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band may have hopping channel carrier
frequencies that are separated by 25 kHz or two-thirds of the 20 dB
bandwidth of the hopping channel, whichever is greater, provided the systems
operate with an output power no greater than 125 mW. The system shall hop to
channel frequencies that are selected at the system hopping rate from a
pseudo randomly ordered list of hopping frequencies. Each frequency must be
used equally on the average by each transmitter. The system receivers shall
have input bandwidths that match the hopping channel bandwidths of their
corresponding transmitters and shall shift frequencies in synchronization
with the transmitted signals.

(i) For frequency hopping systems operating in the 902–928 MHz band: if the
20 dB bandwidth of the hopping channel is less than 250 kHz, the system
shall use at least 50 hopping frequencies and the average time of occupancy
on any frequency shall not be greater than 0.4 seconds within a 20 second
period; if the 20 dB bandwidth of the hopping channel is 250 kHz or greater,
the system shall use at least 25 hopping frequencies and the average time of
occupancy on any frequency shall not be greater than 0.4 seconds within a 10
second period. The maximum allowed 20 dB bandwidth of the hopping channel is
500 kHz.

(ii) Frequency hopping systems operating in the 5725–5850 MHz band shall use
at least 75 hopping frequencies. The maximum 20 dB bandwidth of the hopping
channel is 1 MHz. The average time of occupancy on any frequency shall not
be greater than 0.4 seconds within a 30 second period.

(iii) Frequency hopping systems in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band shall use at
least 15 channels. The average time of occupancy on any channel shall not be
greater than 0.4 seconds within a period of 0.4 seconds multiplied by the
number of hopping channels employed. Frequency hopping systems may avoid or
suppress transmissions on a particular hopping frequency provided that a
minimum of 15 channels are used.

(2) Systems using digital modulation techniques may operate in the 902–928
MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, and 5725–5850 MHz bands. The minimum 6 dB bandwidth
shall be at least 500 kHz.

(b) The maximum peak conducted output power of the intentional radiator
shall not exceed the following:

(1) For frequency hopping systems operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band
employing at least 75 non-overlapping hopping channels, and all frequency
hopping systems in the 5725–5850 MHz band: 1 watt. For all other frequency
hopping systems in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band: 0.125 watts.

(2) For frequency hopping systems operating in the 902–928 MHz band: 1 watt
for systems employing at least 50 hopping channels; and, 0.25 watts for
systems employing less than 50 hopping channels, but at least 25 hopping
channels, as permitted under paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section.

(3) For systems using digital modulation in the 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5
MHz, and 5725–5850 MHz bands: 1 Watt. As an alternative to a peak power
measurement, compliance with the one Watt limit can be based on a
measurement of the maximum conducted output power. Maximum Conducted Output
Power is defined as the total transmit power delivered to all antennas and
antenna elements averaged across all symbols in the signaling alphabet when
the transmitter is operating at its maximum power control level. Power must
be summed across all antennas and antenna elements. The average must not
include any time intervals during which the transmitter is off or is
transmitting at a reduced power level. If multiple modes of operation are
possible (e.g., alternative modulation methods), the maximum conducted
output power is the highest total transmit power occurring in any mode.

(4) The conducted output power limit specified in paragraph (b) of this
section is based on the use of antennas with directional gains that do not
exceed 6 dBi. Except as shown in paragraph (c) of this section, if
transmitting antennas of directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, the
conducted output power from the intentional radiator shall be reduced below
the stated values in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), and (b)(3) of this section,
as appropriate, by the amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna
exceeds 6 dBi.

(i) Systems operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band that are used exclusively
for fixed, point-to-point operations may employ transmitting antennas with
directional gain greater than 6 dBi provided the maximum peak output power
of the intentional radiator is reduced by 1 dB for every 3 dB that the
directional gain of the antenna exceeds 6 dBi.

(ii) Systems operating in the 5725–5850 MHz band that are used exclusively
for fixed, point-to-point operations may employ transmitting antennas with
directional gain greater than 6 dBi without any corresponding reduction in
transmitter peak output power.

(iii) Fixed, point-to-point operation, as used in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and
(b)(3)(ii) of this section, excludes the use of point-to-multipoint systems,
omnidirectional applications, and multiple co-located intentional radiators
transmitting the same information. The operator of the spread spectrum
intentional radiator or, if the equipment is professionally installed, the
installer is responsible for ensuring that the system is used exclusively
for fixed, point-to-point operations. The instruction manual furnished with
the intentional radiator shall contain language in the installation
instructions informing the operator and the installer of this
responsibility.

(1) Fixed point-to-point operation:

(i) Systems operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz band that are used exclusively
for fixed, point-to-point operations may employ transmitting antennas with
directional gain greater than 6 dBi provided the maximum conducted output
power of the intentional radiator is reduced by 1 dB for every 3 dB that the
directional gain of the antenna exceeds 6 dBi.

(iii) Fixed, point-to-point operation, as used in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and
(c)(1)(ii) of this section, excludes the use of point-to-multipoint systems,
omnidirectional applications, and multiple co-located intentional radiators
transmitting the same information. The operator of the spread spectrum or
digitally modulated intentional radiator or, if the equipment is
professionally installed, the installer is responsible for ensuring that the
system is used exclusively for fixed, point-to-point operations. The
instruction manual furnished with the intentional radiator shall contain
language in the installation instructions informing the operator and the
installer of this responsibility.

(2) In addition to the provisions in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3), (b)(4) and
(c)(1)(i) of this section, transmitters operating in the 2400–2483.5 MHz
band that emit multiple directional beams, simultaneously or sequentially,
for the purpose of directing signals to individual receivers or to groups of
receivers provided the emissions comply with the following:

(i) Different information must be transmitted to each receiver.

(ii) If the transmitter employs an antenna system that emits multiple
directional beams but does not do emit multiple directional beams
simultaneously, the total output power conducted to the array or arrays that
comprise the device, i.e., the sum of the power supplied to all antennas,
antenna elements, staves, etc. and summed across all carriers or frequency
channels, shall not exceed the limit specified in paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(3)
of this section, as applicable. However, the total conducted output power
shall be reduced by 1 dB below the specified limits for each 3 dB that the
directional gain of the antenna/antenna array exceeds 6 dBi. The directional
antenna gain shall be computed as follows:

(A) The directional gain shall be calculated as the sum of 10 log (number of
array elements or staves) plus the directional gain of the element or stave
having the highest gain.

(B) A lower value for the directional gain than that calculated in paragraph
(c)(2)(ii)(A) of this section will be accepted if sufficient evidence is
presented, e.g., due to shading of the array or coherence loss in the
beamforming.

(iii) If a transmitter employs an antenna that operates simultaneously on
multiple directional beams using the same or different frequency channels,
the power supplied to each emission beam is subject to the power limit
specified in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section. If transmitted beams
overlap, the power shall be reduced to ensure that their aggregate power
does not exceed the limit specified in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section.
In addition, the aggregate power transmitted simultaneously on all beams
shall not exceed the limit specified in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section
by more than 8 dB.

(iv) Transmitters that emit a single directional beam shall operate under
the provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section.

(d) In any 100 kHz bandwidth outside the frequency band in which the spread
spectrum or digitally modulated intentional radiator is operating, the radio
frequency power that is produced by the intentional radiator shall be at
least 20 dB below that in the 100 kHz bandwidth within the band that
contains the highest level of the desired power, based on either an RF
conducted or a radiated measurement, provided the transmitter demonstrates
compliance with the peak conducted power limits. If the transmitter complies
with the conducted power limits based on the use of RMS averaging over a
time interval, as permitted under paragraph (b)(3) of this section, the
attenuation required under this paragraph shall be 30 dB instead of 20 dB.
Attenuation below the general limits specified in §15.209(a) is not
required. In addition, radiated emissions which fall in the restricted
bands, as defined in §15.205(a), must also comply with the radiated emission
limits specified in §15.209(a) (see §15.205(c)).

(e) For digitally modulated systems, the power spectral density conducted
from the intentional radiator to the antenna shall not be greater than 8 dBm
in any 3 kHz band during any time interval of continuous transmission. This
power spectral density shall be determined in accordance with the provisions
of paragraph (b) of this section. The same method of determining the
conducted output power shall be used to determine the power spectral
density.

(f) For the purposes of this section, hybrid systems are those that employ a
combination of both frequency hopping and digital modulation techniques. The
frequency hopping operation of the hybrid system, with the direct sequence
or digital modulation operation turned off, shall have an average time of
occupancy on any frequency not to exceed 0.4 seconds within a time period in
seconds equal to the number of hopping frequencies employed multiplied by
0.4. The digital modulation operation of the hybrid system, with the
frequency hopping operation turned off, shall comply with the power density
requirements of paragraph (d) of this section.

(g) Frequency hopping spread spectrum systems are not required to employ all
available hopping channels during each transmission. However, the system,
consisting of both the transmitter and the receiver, must be designed to
comply with all of the regulations in this section should the transmitter be
presented with a continuous data (or information) stream. In addition, a
system employing short transmission bursts must comply with the definition
of a frequency hopping system and must distribute its transmissions over the
minimum number of hopping channels specified in this section.

(h) The incorporation of intelligence within a frequency hopping spread
spectrum system that permits the system to recognize other users within the
spectrum band so that it individually and independently chooses and adapts
its hopsets to avoid hopping on occupied channels is permitted. The
coordination of frequency hopping systems in any other manner for the
express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping
frequencies by multiple transmitters is not permitted.

Note: Spread spectrum systems are sharing these bands on a noninterference
basis with systems supporting critical Government requirements that have
been allocated the usage of these bands, secondary only to ISM equipment
operated under the provisions of part 18 of this chapter. Many of these
Government systems are airborne radiolocation systems that emit a high EIRP
which can cause interference to other users. Also, investigations of the
effect of spread spectrum interference to U. S. Government operations in the
902–928 MHz band may require a future decrease in the power limits allowed
for spread spectrum operation.

(i) Systems operating under the provisions of this section shall be operated
in a manner that ensures that the public is not exposed to radio frequency
energy levels in excess of the Commission's guidelines. See §1.1307(b)(1) of
this chapter.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 28762 , July 13, 1990; 62 FR 26242 , May 13, 1997; 65 FR 57561 , Sept. 25, 2000; 67 FR 42734 , June 25,
2002; 69 FR 54035 , Sept. 7, 2004; 72 FR 5632 , Feb. 7, 2007]

§ 15.249 Operation within the bands 902–928 MHz, 2400–2483.5 MHz, 5725–5875
MHZ, and 24.0–24.25 GHz.

top

(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, the field strength
of emissions from intentional radiators operated within these frequency
bands shall comply with the following:
Fundamental frequency Field strength of fundamental (millivolts/meter) Field
strength of harmonics (microvolts/meter)
902–928 MHz 50 500
2400–2483.5 MHz 50 500
5725–5875 MHz 50 500
24.0–24.25 GHz 250 2500

(b) Fixed, point-to-point operation as referred to in this paragraph shall
be limited to systems employing a fixed transmitter transmitting to a fixed
remote location. Point-to-multipoint systems, omnidirectional applications,
and multiple co-located intentional radiators transmitting the same
information are not allowed. Fixed, point-to-point operation is permitted in
the 24.05–24.25 GHz band subject to the following conditions:

(1) The field strength of emissions in this band shall not exceed 2500
millivolts/meter.

(2) The frequency tolerance of the carrier signal shall be maintained within
±0.001% of the operating frequency over a temperature variation of -20
degrees to +50 degrees C at normal supply voltage, and for a variation in
the primary supply voltage from 85% to 115% of the rated supply voltage at a
temperature of 20 degrees C. For battery operated equipment, the equipment
tests shall be performed using a new battery.

(3) Antenna gain must be at least 33 dBi. Alternatively, the main lobe
beamwidth must not exceed 3.5 degrees. The beamwidth limit shall apply to
both the azimuth and elevation planes. At antenna gains over 33 dBi or
beamwidths narrower than 3.5 degrees, power must be reduced to ensure that
the field strength does not exceed 2500 millivolts/meter.

(d) Emissions radiated outside of the specified frequency bands, except for
harmonics, shall be attenuated by at least 50 dB below the level of the
fundamental or to the general radiated emission limits in §15.209, whichever
is the lesser attenuation.

(e) As shown in §15.35(b), for frequencies above 1000 MHz, the field
strength limits in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section are based on
average limits. However, the peak field strength of any emission shall not
exceed the maximum permitted average limits specified above by more than 20
dB under any condition of modulation. For point-to-point operation under
paragraph (b) of this section, the peak field strength shall not exceed 2500
millivolts/meter at 3 meters along the antenna azimuth.

(f) Parties considering the manufacture, importation, marketing or operation
of equipment under this section should also note the requirement in
§15.37(d).

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 25095 , June 20, 1990; 67 FR 1625 , Jan. 14, 2002]

§ 15.250 Operation of wideband systems within the band 5925–7250 MHz.

top

(a) The −10 dB bandwidth of a device operating under the provisions of this
section must be contained within the 5925–7250 MHz band under all conditions
of operation including the effects from stepped frequency, frequency hopping
or other modulation techniques that may be employed as well as the frequency
stability of the transmitter over expected variations in temperature and
supply voltage.

(b) The −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission shall be at least 50
MHz. For transmitters that employ frequency hopping, stepped frequency or
similar modulation types, measurement of the −10 dB minimum bandwidth
specified in this paragraph shall be made with the frequency hop or step
function disabled and with the transmitter operating continuously at a
fundamental frequency following the provisions of §15.31(m).

(c) Operation on board an aircraft or a satellite is prohibited. Devices
operating under this section may not be employed for the operation of toys.
Except for operation onboard a ship or a terrestrial transportation vehicle,
the use of a fixed outdoor infrastructure is prohibited. A fixed
infrastructure includes antennas mounted on outdoor structures, e.g. ,
antennas mounted on the outside of a building or on a telephone pole.

(d) Emissions from a transmitter operating under this section shall not
exceed the following equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) density
levels:

(1) The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under the
provisions of this section shall not exceed the following RMS average limits
based on measurements using a 1 MHz resolution bandwidth:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −75.3
1610–1990 −63.3
1990–3100 −61.3
3100–5925 −51.3
5925–7250 −41.3
7250–10600 −51.3
Above 10600 −61.3

(2) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
paragraph (d)(1) of this section, transmitters operating under the
provisions of this section shall not exceed the following RMS average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
1164–1240 −85.3
1559–1610 −85.3

(3) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
emission occurs and this 50 MHz bandwidth must be contained within the
5925–7250 MHz band. The peak EIRP limit is 20 log (RBW/50) dBm where RBW is
the resolution bandwidth in megahertz that is employed by the measurement
instrument. RBW shall not be lower than 1 MHz or greater than 50 MHz. The
video bandwidth of the measurement instrument shall not be less than RBW. If
RBW is greater than 3 MHz, the application for certification filed with the
Commission shall contain a detailed description of the test procedure,
calibration of the test setup, and the instrumentation employed in the
testing.

(4) Radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz shall not exceed the emission
levels in §15.209.

(5) Emissions from digital circuitry used to enable the operation of the
transmitter may comply with the limits in §15.209 provided it can be clearly
demonstrated that those emissions are due solely to emissions from digital
circuitry contained within the transmitter and the emissions are not
intended to be radiated from the transmitter's antenna. Emissions from
associated digital devices, as defined in §15.3(k), e.g. , emissions from
digital circuitry used to control additional functions or capabilities other
than the operation of the transmitter, are subject to the limits contained
in subpart B of this part. Emissisons from these digital circuits shall not
be employed in determining the −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission
or the frequency at which the highest emission level occurs.

(e) Measurement procedures:

(1) All emissions at and below 960 MHz are based on measurements employing a
CISPR quasi-peak detector. Unless otherwise specified, all RMS average
emission levels specified in this section are to be measured utilizing a 1
MHz resolution bandwidth with a one millisecond dwell over each 1 MHz
segment. The frequency span of the analyzer should equal the number of
sampling bins times 1 MHz and the sweep rate of the analyzer should equal
the number of sampling bins times one millisecond. The provision in
§15.35(c) that allows emissions to be averaged over a 100 millisecond period
does not apply to devices operating under this section. The video bandwidth
of the measurement instrument shall not be less than the resolution
bandwidth and trace averaging shall not be employed. The RMS average
emission measurement is to be repeated over multiple sweeps with the
analyzer set for maximum hold until the amplitude stabilizes.

(2) The peak emission measurement is to be repeated over multiple sweeps
with the analyzer set for maximum hold until the amplitude stabilizes.

(3) For transmitters that employ frequency hopping, stepped frequency or
similar modulation types, the peak emission level measurement, the
measurement of the RMS average emission levels, and the measurement to
determine the frequency at which the highest level emission occurs shall be
made with the frequency hop or step function active. Gated signals may be
measured with the gating active. The provisions of §15.31(c) continue to
apply to transmitters that employ swept frequency modulation.

(4) The −10 dB bandwidth is based on measurement using a peak detector, a 1
MHz resolution bandwidth, and a video bandwidth greater than or equal to the
resolution bandwidth.

(5) Alternative measurement procedures may be considered by the Commission.

[ 70 FR 6774 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.251 Operation within the bands 2.9–3.26 GHz, 3.267–3.332 GHz,
3.339–3.3458 GHz, and 3.358–3.6 GHz.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to automatic
vehicle identification systems (AVIS) which use swept frequency techniques
for the purpose of automatically identifying transportation vehicles.

(b) The field strength anywhere within the frequency range swept by the
signal shall not exceed 3000 microvolts/meter/MHz at 3 meters in any
direction. Further, an AVIS, when in its operating position, shall not
produce a field strength greater than 400 microvolts/meter/MHz at 3 meters
in any direction within ±10 degrees of the horizontal plane. In addition to
the provisions of §15.205, the field strength of radiated emissions outside
the frequency range swept by the signal shall be limited to a maximum of 100
microvolts/meter/MHz at 3 meters, measured from 30 MHz to 20 GHz for the
complete system. The emission limits in this paragraph are based on
measurement instrumentation employing an average detector. The provisions in
§15.35 for limiting peak emissions apply.

(c) The minimum sweep repetition rate of the signal shall not be lower than
4000 sweeps per second, and the maximum sweep repetition rate of the signal
shall not exceed 50,000 sweeps per second.

(d) An AVIS shall employ a horn antenna or other comparable directional
antenna for signal emission.

(e) Provision shall be made so that signal emission from the AVIS shall
occur only when the vehicle to be identified is within the radiated field of
the system.

(f) In addition to the labelling requirements in §15.19(a), the label
attached to the AVIS transmitter shall contain a third statement regarding
operational conditions, as follows:

* * * and, (3) during use this device (the antenna) may not be pointed
within ±** degrees of the horizontal plane.

The double asterisks in condition three (**) shall be replaced by the
responsible party with the angular pointing restriction necessary to meet
the horizontal emission limit specified in paragraph (b).

(g) In addition to the information required in subpart J of part 2, the
application for certification shall contain:

(1) Measurements of field strength per MHz along with the intermediate
frequency of the spectrum analyzer or equivalent measuring receiver;

(2) The angular separation between the direction at which maximum field
strength occurs and the direction at which the field strength is reduced to
400 microvolts/meter/MHz at 3 meters;

(3) A photograph of the spectrum analyzer display showing the entire swept
frequency signal and a calibrated scale for the vertical and horizontal
axes; the spectrum analyzer settings that were used shall be labelled on the
photograph; and,

(4) The results of the frequency search for spurious and sideband emissions
from 30 MHz to 20 GHz, exclusive of the swept frequency band, with the
measuring instrument as close as possible to the unit under test.

[ 54 FR 17714 , Apr. 25, 1989; 54 FR 32340 , Aug. 7, 1989]

§ 15.252 Operation of wideband vehicular radar systems within the bands
16.2–17.7 GHz and 23.12–29.0 GHz.

top

(a) Operation under this section is limited to field disturbance sensors
that are mounted in terrestrial transportation vehicles. Terrestrial use is
limited to earth surface-based, non-aviation applications. Operation within
the 16.2–17.7 GHz band is limited to field disturbance sensors that are used
only for back-up assistance and that operate only when the vehicle is
engaged in reverse.

(1) The −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission shall be located within
the 16.2–17.7 GHz band or within the 23.12–29.0 GHz band, exclusive of the
23.6–24.0 GHz restricted band, as appropriate, under all conditions of
operation including the effects from stepped frequency, frequency hopping or
other modulation techniques that may be employed as well as the frequency
stability of the transmitter over expected variations in temperature and
supply voltage.

(2) The −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission shall be 10 MHz or
greater. For transmitters that employ frequency hopping, stepped frequency
or similar modulation types, measurement of the −10 dB minimum bandwidth
specified in this paragraph shall be made with the frequency hop or step
function disabled and with the transmitter operating continuously at a
fundamental frequency following the provisions of §15.31(m).

(3) For systems operating in the 23.12–29.0 GHz band, the frequencies at
which the highest average emission level and at which the highest peak level
emission appear shall be greater than 24.075 GHz.

(4) These devices shall operate only when the vehicle is operating, e.g. ,
the engine is running. Operation shall occur only upon specific activation,
such as upon starting the vehicle, changing gears, or engaging a turn
signal. The operation of these devices shall be related to the proper
functioning of the transportation vehicle, e.g. , collision avoidance.

(b) Emissions from a transmitter operating under this section shall not
exceed the following equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) density
levels:

(1) For transmitters operating in the 16.2–17.7 GHz band, the RMS average
radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under the
provisions of this section shall not exceed the following EIRP limits based
on measurements using a 1 MHz resolution bandwidth:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −75.3
1610–16,200 −61.3
16,200–17,700 −41.3
Above 17,700 −61.3

(2) For transmitters operating in the 23.12–29.0 GHz band, the RMS average
radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under the
provisions of this section shall not exceed the following EIRP limits based
on measurements using a 1 MHz resolution bandwidth:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −75.3
1610–23,120 −61.3
23,120–23,600 −41.3
23,600–24,000 −61.3
24,000–29,000 −41.3
Above 29,000 —61.3

(3) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the tables in
paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section, transmitters operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following RMS average
EIRP limits when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1
kHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
1164–1240 −85.3
1559–1610 −85.3

(4) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
emission occurs and this 50 MHz bandwidth must be contained within the
16.2–17.7 GHz band or the 24.05–29.0 GHz band, as appropriate. The peak EIRP
limit is 20 log (RBW/50) dBm where RBW is the resolution bandwidth in MHz
employed by the measurement instrument. RBW shall not be lower than 1 MHz or
greater than 50 MHz. Further, RBW shall not be greater than the −10 dB
bandwidth of the device under test. For transmitters that employ frequency
hopping, stepped frequency or similar modulation types, measurement of the
−10 dB minimum bandwidth specified in this paragraph shall be made with the
frequency hop or step function disabled and with the transmitter operating
continuously at a fundamental frequency. The video bandwidth of the
measurement instrument shall not be less than RBW. The limit on peak
emissions applies to the 50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which
the highest level radiated emission occurs. If RBW is greater than 3 MHz,
the application for certification shall contain a detailed description of
the test procedure, the instrumentation employed in the testing, and the
calibration of the test setup.

(5) Radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz shall not exceed the emission
levels in §15.209.

(6) Emissions from digital circuitry used to enable the operation of the
transmitter may comply with the limits in §15.209 provided it can be clearly
demonstrated that those emissions are due solely to emissions from digital
circuitry contained within the transmitter and the emissions are not
intended to be radiated from the transmitter's antenna. Emissions from
associated digital devices, as defined in §15.3(k) , e.g. , emissions from
digital circuitry used to control additional functions or capabilities other
than the operation of the transmitter, are subject to the limits contained
in subpart B of this part. Emissions from these digital circuits shall not
be employed in determining the −10 dB bandwidth of the fundamental emission
or the frequency at which the highest emission level occurs.

(2) The peak emission measurement is to be repeated over multiple sweeps
with the analyzer set for maximum hold until the amplitude stabilizes.

(3) For transmitters that employ frequency hopping, stepped frequency or
similar modulation types, the peak emission level measurement, the
measurement of the RMS average emission levels, the measurement to determine
the center frequency, and the measurement to determine the frequency at
which the highest level emission occurs shall be made with the frequency hop
or step function active. Gated signals may be measured with the gating
active. The provisions of §15.31(c) continue to apply to transmitters that
employ swept frequency modulation.

(4) The −10 dB bandwidth is based on measurement using a peak detector, a 1
MHz resolution bandwidth, and a video bandwidth greater than or equal to the
resolution bandwidth.

(5) Alternative measurement procedures may be considered by the Commission.

[ 70 FR 6775 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.253 Operation within the bands 46.7–46.9 GHz and 76.0–77.0 GHz.

top

(a) Operation within the bands 46.7–46.9 GHz and 76.0–77.0 GHz is restricted
to vehicle-mounted field disturbance sensors used as vehicle radar systems.
The transmission of additional information, such as data, is permitted
provided the primary mode of operation is as a vehicle-mounted field
disturbance sensor. Operation under the provisions of this section is not
permitted on aircraft or satellites.

(b) The radiated emission limits within the bands 46.7–46.9 GHz and
76.0–77.0 GHz are as follows:

(1) If the vehicle is not in motion, the power density of any emission
within the bands specified in this section shall not exceed 200 nW/cm^2 at a
distance of 3 meters from the exterior surface of the radiating structure.

(2) For forward-looking vehicle-mounted field disturbance sensors, if the
vehicle is in motion the power density of any emission within the bands
specified in this section shall not exceed 60 μW/cm^2 at a distance of 3
meters from the exterior surface of the radiating structure.

(3) For side-looking or rear-looking vehicle-mounted field disturbance
sensors, if the vehicle is in motion the power density of any emission
within the bands specified in this section shall not exceed 30 μW/cm^2 at a
distance of 3 meters from the exterior surface of the radiating structure.

(c) The power density of any emissions outside the operating band shall
consist solely of spurious emissions and shall not exceed the following:

(1) Radiated emissions below 40 GHz shall not exceed the general limits in
§15.209.

(2) Radiated emissions outside the operating band and between 40 GHz and 200
GHz shall not exceed the following:

(i) For vehicle-mounted field disturbance sensors operating in the band
46.7–46.9 GHz: 2 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters from the exterior surface
of the radiating structure.

(ii) For forward-looking vehicle-mounted field disturbance sensors operating
in the band 76–77 GHz: 600 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters from the
exterior surface of the radiating structure.

(iii) For side-looking or rear-looking vehicle-mounted field disturbance
sensors operating in the band 76–77 GHz: 300 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3
meters from the exterior surface of the radiating structure.

(3) For radiated emissions above 200 GHz from field disturbance sensors
operating in the 76–77 GHz band: the power density of any emission shall not
exceed 1000 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters from the exterior surface of
the radiating structure.

(4) For field disturbance sensors operating in the 76–77 GHz band, the
spectrum shall be investigated up to 231 GHz.

(d) The provisions in §15.35 limiting peak emissions apply.

(e) Fundamental emissions must be contained within the frequency bands
specified in this section during all conditions of operation. Equipment is
presumed to operate over the temperature range −20 to +50 degrees celsius
with an input voltage variation of 85% to 115% of rated input voltage,
unless justification is presented to demonstrate otherwise.

(f) Regardless of the power density levels permitted under this section,
devices operating under the provisions of this section are subject to the
radiofrequency radiation exposure requirements specified in §§1.1307(b),
2.1091 and 2.1093 of this chapter, as appropriate. Applications for
equipment authorization of devices operating under this section must contain
a statement confirming compliance with these requirements for both
fundamental emissions and unwanted emissions. Technical information showing
the basis for this statement must be submitted to the Commission upon
request.

[ 61 FR 14503 , Apr. 2, 1996, as amended at 61 FR 41018 , Aug. 7, 1996; 63 FR 42279 , Aug. 7, 1998]

§ 15.255 Operation within the band 57–64 GHz.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this section is not permitted for the
following products:

(1) Equipment used on aircraft or satellites.

(2) Field disturbance sensors, including vehicle radar systems, unless the
field disturbance sensors are employed for fixed operation. For the purposes
of this section, the reference to fixed operation includes field disturbance
sensors installed in fixed equipment, even if the sensor itself moves within
the equipment.

(b) Within the 57–64 GHz band, emission levels shall not exceed the
following:

(1) For products other than fixed field disturbance sensors, the average
power density of any emission, measured during the transmit interval, shall
not exceed 9 μW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the radiating structure,
and the peak power density of any emission shall not exceed 18 μW/cm^2 , as
measured 3 meters from the radiating structure.

(2) For fixed field disturbance sensors that occupy 500 MHz or less of
bandwidth and that are contained wholly within the frequency band 61.0–61.5
GHz, the average power density of any emission, measured during the transmit
interval, shall not exceed 9 μW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the
radiating structure, and the peak power density of any emission shall not
exceed 18 μW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the radiating structure. In
addition, the average power density of any emission outside of the 61–61.5
GHz band, measured during the transmit interval, but still within the 57–64
GHz band, shall not exceed 9 nW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the
radiating structure, and the peak power density of any emission shall not
exceed 18 nW/cm^2 , as measured three meters from the radiating structure.

(3) For fixed field disturbance sensors other than those operating under the
provisions of paragraph (b)(2) of this section, the peak transmitter output
power shall not exceed 0.1 mW and the peak power density shall not exceed 9
nW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters.

(4) Peak power density shall be measured with an RF detector that has a
detection bandwidth that encompasses the 57–64 GHz band and has a video
bandwidth of at least 10 MHz, or using an equivalent measurement method.

(5) The average emission levels shall be calculated, based on the measured
peak levels, over the actual time period during which transmission occurs.

(1) The power density of any emissions outside the 57–64 GHz band shall
consist solely of spurious emissions.

(2) Radiated emissions below 40 GHz shall not exceed the general limits in
§15.209.

(3) Between 40 GHz and 200 GHz, the level of these emissions shall not
exceed 90 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters.

(4) The levels of the spurious emissions shall not exceed the level of the
fundamental emission.

(d) Only spurious emissions and transmissions related to a
publicly-accessible coordination channel, whose purpose is to coordinate
operation between diverse transmitters with a view towards reducing the
probability of interference throughout the 57–64 GHz band, are permitted in
the 57–57.05 GHz band.

Note to paragraph(d): The 57–57.05 GHz is reserved exclusively for a
publicly-accessible coordination channel. The development of standards for
this channel shall be performed pursuant to authorizations issued under part
5 of this chapter.

(e) Except as specified elsewhere in this paragraph (e), the total peak
transmitter output power shall not exceed 500 mW.

(1) Transmitters with an emission bandwidth of less than 100 MHz must limit
their peak transmitter output power to the product of 500 mW times their
emission bandwidth divided by 100 MHz. For the purposes of this paragraph
(e)(1), emission bandwidth is defined as the instantaneous frequency range
occupied by a steady state radiated signal with modulation, outside which
the radiated power spectral density never exceeds 6 dB below the maximum
radiated power spectral density in the band, as measured with a 100 kHz
resolution bandwidth spectrum analyzer. The center frequency must be
stationary during the measurement interval, even if not stationary during
normal operation (e.g. for frequency hopping devices).

(2) Peak transmitter output power shall be measured with an RF detector that
has a detection bandwidth that encompasses the 57–64 GHz band and that has a
video bandwidth of at least 10 MHz, or using an equivalent measurement
method.

(3) For purposes of demonstrating compliance with this paragraph (e),
corrections to the transmitter output power may be made due to the antenna
and circuit loss.

(f) Fundamental emissions must be contained within the frequency bands
specified in this section during all conditions of operation. Equipment is
presumed to operate over the temperature range −20 to +50 degrees celsius
with an input voltage variation of 85% to 115% of rated input voltage,
unless justification is presented to demonstrate otherwise.

(g) Regardless of the power density levels permitted under this section,
devices operating under the provisions of this section are subject to the
radiofrequency radiation exposure requirements specified in §§1.1307(b),
2.1091 and 2.1093 of this chapter, as appropriate. Applications for
equipment authorization of devices operating under this section must contain
a statement confirming compliance with these requirements for both
fundamental emissions and unwanted emissions. Technical information showing
the basis for this statement must be submitted to the Commission upon
request.

(h) Any transmitter that has received the necessary FCC equipment
authorization under the rules of this chapter may be mounted in a group
installation for simultaneous operation with one or more other
transmitter(s) that have received the necessary FCC equipment authorization,
without any additional equipment authorization. However, no transmitter
operating under the provisions of this section may be equipped with external
phase-locking inputs that permit beam-forming arrays to be realized.

(i) For all transmissions that emanate from inside of a building, within any
one second interval of signal transmission, each transmitter with a peak
output power equal to or greater than 0.1 mW or a peak power density equal
to or greater than 3 nW/cm^2 , as measured 3 meters from the radiating
structure, must transmit a transmitter identification at least once. Each
application for equipment authorization for equipment that will be used
inside of a building must declare that the equipment contains the required
transmitter identification feature and must specify a method whereby
interested parties can obtain sufficient information, at no cost, to enable
them to fully detect and decode this transmitter identification information.
Upon the completion of decoding, the transmitter identification data block
must provide the following fields:

(1) FCC Identifier, which shall be programmed at the factory.

(2) Manufacturer's serial number, which shall be programmed at the factory.

(3) Provision for at least 24 bytes of data relevant to the specific device,
which shall be field programmable. The grantee must implement a method that
makes it possible for users to specify and update this data. The recommended
content of this field is information to assist in contacting the operator.

[ 63 FR 42279 , Aug. 7, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 7409 , Jan. 23, 2001; 68 FR 68547 , Dec. 9, 2003]

§ 15.257 Operation within the band 92–95 GHz.

top

(a) Operation of devices under the provisions of this section is limited to
indoor use;

(1) Devices operating under the provisions of this section, by the nature of
their design, must be capable of operation only indoors. The necessity to
operate with a fixed indoor infrastructure, e.g., a transmitter that must be
connected to the AC power lines, may be considered sufficient to demonstrate
this.

(2) The use of outdoor mounted antennas, e.g., antennas mounted on the
outside of a building or on a telephone pole, or any other outdoors
infrastructure is prohibited.

(3) The emissions from equipment operated under this section shall not be
intentionally directed outside of the building in which the equipment is
located, such as through a window or a doorway.

(4) Devices operating under the provisions of this section shall bear the
following or similar statement in a conspicuous location on the device or in
the instruction manual supplied with the device: “This equipment may only be
operated indoors. Operation outdoors is in violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and
could subject the operator to serious legal penalties.”

(b) Operation under the provisions of this section is not permitted on
aircraft or satellites.

(1) The average power density of any emission, measured during the transmit
interval, shall not exceed 9 uW/sq. cm, as measured at 3 meters from the
radiating structure, and the peak power density of any emission shall not
exceed 18 uW/sq. cm, as measured 3 meters from the radiating structure.

(2) Peak power density shall be measured with an RF detector that has a
detection bandwidth that encompasses the band being used and has a video
bandwidth of at least 10 MHz, or uses an equivalent measurement method.

(3) The average emission limits shall be calculated based on the measured
peak levels, over the actual time period during which transmission occurs.

(d) Limits on spurious emissions:

(1) The power density of any emissions outside the band being used shall
consist solely of spurious emissions.

(2) Radiated emissions below 40 GHz shall not exceed the general limits in
§15.209.

(3) Between 40 GHz and 200 GHz, the level of these emissions shall not
exceed 90 pW/cm^2 at a distance of 3 meters.

(4) The levels of the spurious emissions shall not exceed the level of the
fundamental emission.

(e) The total peak transmitter output power shall not exceed 500 mW.

(f) Fundamental emissions must be contained within the frequency bands
specified in this section during all conditions of operation. Equipment is
presumed to operate over the temperature range −20 to +50 degrees Celsius
with an input voltage variation of 85% to 115% of rated input voltage,
unless justification is presented to demonstrate otherwise.

(g) Regardless of the maximum EIRP and maximum power density levels
permitted under this section, devices operating under the provisions of this
section are subject to the radiofrequency radiation exposure requirements
specified in 47 CFR 1.1307(b), 2.1091, and 2.1093, as appropriate.
Applications for equipment authorization of devices operating under this
section must contain a statement confirming compliance with these
requirements for both fundamental emissions and unwanted emissions.
Technical information showing the basis for this statement must be submitted
to the Commission upon request.

[ 69 FR 3265 , Jan. 23, 2004]

Subpart D—Unlicensed Personal Communications Service Devices

top

Source: 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993, unless otherwise noted.

§ 15.301 Scope.

top

This subpart sets out the regulations for unlicensed personal communications
services (PCS) devices operating in the 1920–1930 MHz band.

[ 69 FR 77949 , Dec. 29, 2004]

§ 15.303 Definitions.

top

(a) Asynchronous devices. Devices that transmit RF energy at irregular time
intervals, as typified by local area network data systems.

(b) Coordinatable PCS device. PCS devices whose geographical area of
operation is sufficiently controlled either by necessity of operation with a
fixed infrastructure or by disabling mechanisms to allow adequate
coordination of their locations relative to incumbent fixed microwave
facilities.

(c) Emission bandwidth. For purposes of this subpart the emission bandwidth
shall be determined by measuring the width of the signal between two points,
one below the carrier center frequency and one above the carrier center
frequency, that are 26 dB down relative to the maximum level of the
modulated carrier. Compliance with the emissions limits is based on the use
of measurement instrumentation employing a peak detector function with an
instrument resolutions bandwidth approximately equal to 1.0 percent of the
emission bandwidth of the device under measurement.

(d) Isochronous devices. Devices that transmit at a regular interval,
typified by time-division voice systems.

(e) Noncoordinatable PCS device. A PCS device that is capable of randomly
roaming and operating in geographic areas containing incumbent microwave
facilities such that operation of the PCS device will potentially cause
harmful interference to the incumbent microwave facilities.

(f) Peak transmit power. The peak power output as measured over an interval
of time equal to the frame rate or transmission burst of the device under
all conditions of modulation. Usually this parameter is measured as a
conducted emission by direct connection of a calibrated test instrument to
the equipment under test. If the device cannot be connected directly,
alternative techniques acceptable to the Commission may be used.

(g) Personal Communications Services (PCS) Devices [Unlicensed]. Intentional
radiators operating in the frequency band 1920–1930 MHz that provide a wide
array of mobile and ancillary fixed communication services to individuals
and businesses.

(h) Spectrum window. An amount of spectrum equal to the intended emission
bandwidth in which operation is desired.

(i) Sub-band. For purposes of this subpart the term sub-band refers to the
spectrum allocated for isochronous or asynchronous transmission.

(j) Thermal noise power. The noise power in watts defined by the formula
N=kTB where N is the noise power in watts, K is Boltzmann's constant, T is
the absolute temperature in degrees Kelvin (e.g., 295 °K) and B is the
emission bandwidth of the device in hertz.

(k) Time window. An interval of time in which transmission is desired.

[ 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 32852 , June 24, 1994; 60 FR 13073 , Mar. 10, 1995; 69 FR 62620 , Oct. 27, 2004; 69 FR 77949 , Dec. 29,
2004]

§ 15.305 Equipment authorization requirement.

top

PCS devices operating under this subpart shall be certified by the
Commission under the procedures in subpart J of part 2 of this chapter
before marketing. The application for certification must contain sufficient
information to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this subpart.

§ 15.307 Coordination with fixed microwave service.

top

(a) UTAM, Inc. is designated to coordinate and manage the transition of the
1910–1930 MHz band from the Private Operational-Fixed Microwave Service
(OFS) operating under part 101 of this chapter to unlicensed PCS operations,

(b) Each application for certification of equipment operating under the
provisions of this subpart must be accompanied by an affidavit from UTAM,
Inc. certifying that the applicant is a participating member of UTAM, Inc.
In the event a grantee fails to fulfill the obligations attendant to
participation in UTAM, Inc., the Commission may invoke administrative
sanctions as necessary to preclude continued marketing and installation of
devices covered by the grant of certification, including but not limited to
revoking certification.

(c) An application for certification of a PCS device that is deemed by UTAM,
Inc. to be noncoordinatable will not be accepted until the Commission
announces that a need for coordination no longer exists.

(d) A coordinatable PCS device is required to incorporate means that ensure
that it cannot be activated until its location has been coordinated by UTAM,
Inc. The application for certification shall contain an explanation of all
measures taken to prevent unauthorized operation. This explanation shall
include all procedural safeguards, such as the mandatory use of licensed
technicians to install the equipment, and a complete description of all
technical features controlling activation of the device.

(e) A coordinatable PCS device shall incorporate an automatic mechanism for
disabling operation in the event it is moved outside the geographic area
where its operation has been coordinated by UTAM, Inc. The application for
certification shall contain a full description of the safeguards against
unauthorized relocation and must satisfy the Commission that the safeguards
cannot be easily defeated.

(f) At such time as the Commission deems that the need for coordination
between unlicensed PCS operations and existing Part 101 Private
Operational-Fixed Microwave Services ceases to exist, the disabling
mechanism required by paragraph (e) of this section will no longer be
required.

(g) Operations under the provisions of this subpart are required to protect
systems in the Private Operational-Fixed Microwave Service operating within
the 1850–1990 MHz band until the dates and conditions specified in §§101.69
through 101.73 of this chapter for termination of primary status.
Interference protection is not required for part 101 stations in this band
licensed on a secondary basis.

(h) The operator of a PCS device that is relocated from the coordinated area
specified by UTAM, Inc., must cease operating the device until coordination
for the new location is verified by UTAM, Inc.

[ 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 32852 , June 24, 1994; 60 FR 27425 , May 24, 1995; 61 FR 29689 , June 12, 1996]

§ 15.309 Cross reference.

top

(a) The provisions of subpart A of this part apply to unlicensed PCS
devices, except where specific provisions are contained in subpart D.

(b) The requirements of subpart D apply only to the radio transmitter
contained in the PCS device. Other aspects of the operation of a PCS device
may be subject to requirements contained elsewhere in this chapter. In
particular, a PCS device that includes digital circuitry not directly
associated with the radio transmitter also is subject to the requirements
for unintentional radiators in subpart B.

§ 15.311 Labeling requirements.

top

In addition to the labeling requirements of §15.19(a)(3), all devices
operating in the frequency band 1920–1930 MHz authorized under this subpart
must bear a prominently located label with the following statement:

Installation of this equipment is subject to notification and coordination
with UTAM, Inc. Any relocation of this equipment must be coordinated
through, and approved by UTAM. UTAM may be contacted at 1–800–429–8826.

[ 69 FR 62620 , Oct. 27, 2004]

§ 15.313 Measurement procedures.

top

Measurements must be made in accordance with subpart A, except where
specific procedures are specified in subpart D. If no guidance is provided,
the measurement procedure must be in accordance with good engineering
practice.

§ 15.315 Conducted limits.

top

An unlicensed PCS device that is designed to be connected to the public
utility (AC) power line must meet the limits specified in §15.207.

§ 15.317 Antenna requirement.

top

An unlicensed PCS device must meet the antenna requirement of §15.203.

§ 15.319 General technical requirements.

top

(a) [Reserved]

(b) All transmissions must use only digital modulation techniques.

(c) Peak transmit power shall not exceed 100 microwatts multiplied by the
square root of the emission bandwidth in hertz. Peak transmit power must be
measured over any interval of continuous transmission using instrumentation
calibrated in terms of an rms-equivalent voltage. The measurement results
shall be properly adjusted for any instrument limitations, such as detector
response times, limited resolution bandwidth capability when compared to the
emission bandwidth, sensitivity, etc., so as to obtain a true peak
measurement for the emission in question over the full bandwidth of the
channel.

(d) Power spectral density shall not exceed 3 milliwatts in any 3 kHz
bandwidth as measured with a spectrum analyzer having a resolution bandwidth
of 3 kHz.

(e) The peak transmit power shall be reduced by the amount in decibels that
the maximum directional gain of the antenna exceeds 3 dBi.

(f) The device shall automatically discontinue transmission in case of
either absence of information to transmit or operational failure. The
provisions in this section are not intended to preclude transmission of
control and signaling information or use of repetitive codes used by certain
digital technologies to complete frame or burst intervals.

(g) Notwithstanding other technical requirements specified in this subpart,
attenuation of emissions below the general emission limits in §15.209 is not
required.

(h) Where there is a transition between limits, the tighter limit shall
apply at the transition point.

(i) Unlicensed PCS devices are subject to the radiofrequency radiation
exposure requirements specified in §§1.1307(b), 2.1091 and 2.1093 of this
chapter, as appropriate. All equipment shall be considered to operate in a
“general population/uncontrolled” environment. Applications for equipment
authorization of devices operating under this section must contain a
statement confirming compliance with these requirements for both fundamental
emissions and unwanted emissions. Technical information showing the basis
for this statement must be submitted to the Commission upon request.

[ 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 32852 , June 24, 1994; 59 FR 40835 , Aug. 10, 1994; 60 FR 13073 , Mar. 10, 1995; 61 FR 41018 , Aug. 7, 1996;
69 FR 62621 , Oct. 27, 2004; 69 FR 77949 , Dec. 29, 2004]

§ 15.321 [Reserved]

top

§ 15.323 Specific requirements for devices operating in the 1920–1930 MHz
sub-band.

top

(a) Operation shall be contained within the 1920–1930 MHz band. The emission
bandwidth shall be less then 2.5 MHz. The power level shall be as specified
in §15.319(c), but in no event shall the emission bandwidth be less than 50
kHz.

(b) [Reserved]

(c) Devices must incorporate a mechanism for monitoring the time and
spectrum windows that its transmission is intended to occupy. The following
criteria must be met:

(1) Immediately prior to initiating transmission, devices must monitor the
combined time and spectrum windows in which they intend to transmit for a
period of at least 10 milliseconds for systems designed to use a 10
milliseconds or shorter frame period or at least 20 milliseconds for systems
designed to use a 20 milliseconds frame period.

(2) The monitoring threshold must not be more than 30 dB above the thermal
noise power for a bandwidth equivalent to the emission bandwidth used by the
device.

(3) If no signal above the threshold level is detected, transmission may
commence and continue with the same emission bandwidth in the monitored time
and spectrum windows without further monitoring. However, occupation of the
same combined time and spectrum windows by a device or group of cooperating
devices continuously over a period of time longer than 8 hours is not
permitted without repeating the access criteria.

(4) Once access to specific combined time and spectrum windows is obtained
an acknowledgment from a system participant must be received by the
initiating transmitter within one second or transmission must cease.
Periodic acknowledgments must be received at least every 30 seconds or
transmission must cease. Channels used exclusively for control and signaling
information may transmit continuously for 30 seconds without receiving an
acknowledgment, at which time the access criteria must be repeated.

(5) If access to spectrum is not available as determined by the above, and a
minimum of 40 duplex system access channels are defined for the system, the
time and spectrum windows with the lowest power level below a monitoring
threshold of 50 dB above the thermal noise power determined for the emission
bandwidth may be accessed. A device utilizing the provisions of this
paragraph must have monitored all access channels defined for its system
within the last 10 seconds and must verify, within the 20 milliseconds (40
milliseconds for devices designed to use a 20 milliseconds frame period)
immediately preceding actual channel access that the detected power of the
selected time and spectrum windows is no higher than the previously detected
value. The power measurement resolution for this comparison must be accurate
to within 6 dB. No device or group of co-operating devices located within 1
meter of each other shall during any frame period occupy more than 6 MHz of
aggregate bandwidth, or alternatively, more than one third of the time and
spectrum windows defined by the system.

(6) If the selected combined time and spectrum windows are unavailable, the
device may either monitor and select different windows or seek to use the
same windows after waiting an amount of time, randomly chosen from a uniform
random distribution between 10 and 150 milliseconds, commencing when the
channel becomes available.

(7) The monitoring system bandwidth must be equal to or greater than the
emission bandwidth of the intended transmission and have a maximum reaction
time less than 50xSQRT (1.25/emission bandwidth in MHz) microseconds for
signals at the applicable threshold level but shall not be required to be
less than 50 microseconds. If a signal is detected that is 6 dB or more
above the applicable threshold level, the maximum reaction time shall be
35xSQRT (1.25/emission bandwidth in MHz) microseconds but shall not be
required to be less than 35 microseconds.

(8) The monitoring system shall use the same antenna used for transmission,
or an antenna that yields equivalent reception at that location.

(9) Devices that have a power output lower than the maximum permitted under
this subpart may increase their monitoring detection threshold by one
decibel for each one decibel that the transmitter power is below the maximum
permitted.

(10) An initiating device may attempt to establish a duplex connection by
monitoring both its intended transmit and receive time and spectrum windows.
If both the intended transmit and receive time and spectrum windows meet the
access criteria, then the initiating device can initiate a transmission in
the intended transmit time and spectrum window. If the power detected by the
responding device can be decoded as a duplex connection signal from the
initiating device, then the responding device may immediately begin
transmitting on the receive time and spectrum window monitored by the
initiating device.

(11) An initiating device that is prevented from monitoring during its
intended transmit window due to monitoring system blocking from the
transmissions of a co-located (within one meter) transmitter of the same
system, may monitor the portions of the time and spectrum windows in which
they intend to receive over a period of at least 10 milliseconds. The
monitored time and spectrum window must total at least 50 percent of the 10
millisecond frame interval and the monitored spectrum must be within 1.25
MHz of the center frequency of channel(s) already occupied by that device or
co-located co-operating devices. If the access criteria is met for the
intended receive time and spectrum window under the above conditions, then
transmission in the intended transmit window by the initiating device may
commence.

(12) The provisions of (c)(10) or (c)(11) of this section shall not be used
to extend the range of spectrum occupied over space or time for the purpose
of denying fair access to spectrum to other devices.

(d) Emissions outside the sub-band shall be attenuated below a reference
power of 112 milliwatts as follows: 30 dB between the sub-band and 1.25 MHz
above or below the sub-band; 50 dB between 1.25 and 2.5 MHz above or below
the sub-band; and 60 dB at 2.5 MHz or greater above or below the sub-band.
Emissions inside the sub-band must comply with the following emission mask:
In the bands between 1B and 2B measured from the center of the emission
bandwidth the total power emitted by the device shall be at least 30 dB
below the transmit power permitted for that device; in the bands between 2B
and 3B measured from the center of the emission bandwidth the total power
emitted by an intentional radiator shall be at least 50 dB below the
transmit power permitted for that radiator; in the bands between 3B and the
sub-band edge the total power emitted by an intentional radiator in the
measurement bandwidth shall be at least 60 dB below the transmit power
permitted for that radiator. “B” is defined as the emission bandwidth of the
device in hertz. Compliance with the emission limits is based on the use of
measurement instrumentation employing peak detector function with an
instrument resolution bandwidth approximately equal to 1.0 percent of the
emission bandwidth of the device under measurement.

(e) The frame period (a set of consecutive time slots in which the position
of each time slot can be identified by reference to a synchronizing source)
of an intentional radiator operating in these sub-bands shall be 20
milliseconds or 10 milliseconds/X where X is a positive whole number. Each
device that implements time division for the purposes of maintaining a
duplex connection on a given frequency carrier shall maintain a frame
repetition rate with a frequency stability of at least 50 parts per million
(ppm). Each device which further divides access in time in order to support
multiple communication links on a given frequency carrier shall maintain a
frame repetition rate with a frequency stability of at least 10 ppm. The
jitter (time-related, abrupt, spurious variations in the duration of the
frame interval) introduced at the two ends of such a communication link
shall not exceed 25 microseconds for any two consecutive transmissions.
Transmissions shall be continuous in every time and spectrum window during
the frame period defined for the device.

(f) The frequency stability of the carrier frequency of the intentional
radiator shall be maintained within ±10 ppm over 1 hour or the interval
between channel access monitoring, whichever is shorter. The frequency
stability shall be maintained over a temperature variation of −20° to +50 °C
at normal supply voltage, and over a variation in the primary supply voltage
of 85 percent to 115 percent of the rated supply voltage at a temperature of
20 °C. For equipment that is capable only of operating from a battery, the
frequency stability tests shall be performed using a new battery without any
further requirement to vary supply voltage.

[ 58 FR 59180 , Nov. 8, 1993; 59 FR 15269 , Mar. 31, 1994. Redesignated at 59 FR 32852 , June 24, 1994, as amended at 59 FR 32853 , June 24, 1994; 59 FR 40835 , Aug. 10, 1994; 59 FR 55373 , Nov. 7, 1994; 60 FR 3303 , Jan. 13, 1995;
69 FR 62621 , Oct. 27, 2004]

Subpart E—Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure Devices

top

§ 15.401 Scope.

top

This subpart sets out the regulations for unlicensed National Information
Infrastructure (U-NII) devices operating in the 5.15–5.35 GHz, 5.47–5.725
GHz and 5.725–5.825 GHz bands.

[ 69 FR 2686 , Jan. 20, 2004]

§ 15.403 Definitions.

top

(a) Access Point (AP). A U-NII transceiver that operates either as a bridge
in a peer-to-peer connection or as a connector between the wired and
wireless segments of the network.

(b) Available Channel. A radio channel on which a Channel Availability Check
has not identified the presence of a radar.

(c) Average Symbol Envelope Power. The average symbol envelope power is the
average, taken over all symbols in the signaling alphabet, of the envelope
power for each symbol.

(d) Channel Availability Check. A check during which the U-NII device
listens on a particular radio channel to identify whether there is a radar
operating on that radio channel.

(e) Channel Move Time. The time needed by a U-NII device to cease all
transmissions on the current channel upon detection of a radar signal above
the DFS detection threshold.

(f) Digital modulation. The process by which the characteristics of a
carrier wave are varied among a set of predetermined discrete values in
accordance with a digital modulating function as specified in document ANSI
C63.17–1998.

(g) Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is a mechanism that dynamically
detects signals from other systems and avoids co-channel operation with
these systems, notably radar systems.

(h) DFS Detection Threshold. The required detection level defined by
detecting a received signal strength (RSS) that is greater than a threshold
specified, within the U-NII device channel bandwidth.

(i) Emission bandwidth. For purposes of this subpart the emission bandwidth
shall be determined by measuring the width of the signal between two points,
one below the carrier center frequency and one above the carrier center
frequency, that are 26 dB down relative to the maximum level of the
modulated carrier. Determination of the emissions bandwidth is based on the
use of measurement instrumentation employing a peak detector function with
an instrument resolution bandwidth approximately equal to 1.0 percent of the
emission bandwidth of the device under measurement.

(j) In-Service Monitoring. A mechanism to check a channel in use by the
U-NII device for the presence of a radar.

(k) Non-Occupancy Period. The required period in which, once a channel has
been recognized as containing a radar signal by a U-NII device, the channel
will not be selected as an available channel.

(l) Operating Channel. Once a U-NII device starts to operate on an Available
Channel then that channel becomes the Operating Channel.

(m) Peak Power Spectral Density. The peak power spectral density is the
maximum power spectral density, within the specified measurement bandwidth,
within the U-NII device operating band.

(n) Maximum Conducted Output Power. The total transmit power delivered to
all antennas and antenna elements averaged across all symbols in the
signaling alphabet when the transmitter is operating at its maximum power
control level. Power must be summed across all antennas and antenna
elements. The average must not include any time intervals during which the
transmitter is off or is transmitting at a reduced power level. If multiple
modes of operation are possible ( e.g., alternative modulation methods), the
maximum conducted output power is the highest total transmit power occurring
in any mode.

(o) Power Spectral Density. The power spectral density is the total energy
output per unit bandwidth from a pulse or sequence of pulses for which the
transmit power is at its peak or maximum level, divided by the total
duration of the pulses. This total time does not include the time between
pulses during which the transmit power is off or below its maximum level.

(p) Pulse. A pulse is a continuous transmission of a sequence of modulation
symbols, during which the average symbol envelope power is constant.

(q) RLAN. Radio Local Area Network.

(r) Transmit Power Control (TPC). A feature that enables a U-NII device to
dynamically switch between several transmission power levels in the data
transmission process.

(s) U-NII devices. Intentional radiators operating in the frequency bands
5.15–5.35 GHz and 5.470–5.825 GHz that use wideband digital modulation
techniques and provide a wide array of high data rate mobile and fixed
communications for individuals, businesses, and institutions.

[ 69 FR 2687 , Jan. 20, 2004, as amended at 69 FR 54036 , Sept. 7, 2004]

§ 15.405 Cross reference.

top

(a) The provisions of subparts A, B, and C of this part apply to unlicensed
U-NII devices, except where specific provisions are contained in subpart E.
Manufacturers should note that this includes the provisions of §§15.203 and
15.205.

(b) The requirements of subpart E apply only to the radio transmitter
contained in the U-NII device. Other aspects of the operation of a U-NII
device may be subject to requirements contained elsewhere in this chapter.
In particular, a U-NII device that includes digital circuitry not directly
associated with the radio transmitter also is subject to the requirements
for unintentional radiators in subpart B.

[ 63 FR 40835 , July 31, 1998]

§ 15.407 General technical requirements.

top

(a) Power limits:

(1) For the band 5.15–5.25 GHz, the maximum conducted output power over the
frequency band of operation shall not exceed the lesser of 50 mW or 4 dBm +
10 log B, where B is the 26–dB emission bandwidth in MHz. In addition, the
peak power spectral density shall not exceed 4 dBm in any 1–MHz band. If
transmitting antennas of directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, both
the maximum conducted output power and the peak power spectral density shall
be reduced by the amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna
exceeds 6 dBi.

(2) For the 5.25–5.35 GHz and 5.47–5.725 GHz bands, the maximum conducted
output power over the frequency bands of operation shall not exceed the
lesser of 250 mW or 11 dBm + 10 log B, where B is the 26 dB emission
bandwidth in megahertz. In addition, the peak power spectral density shall
not exceed 11 dBm in any 1 megahertz band. If transmitting antennas of
directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, both the maximum conducted
output power and the peak power spectral density shall be reduced by the
amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna exceeds 6 dBi.

(3) For the band 5.725–5.825 GHz, the maximum conducted output power over
the frequency band of operation shall not exceed the lesser of 1 W or 17 dBm
+ 10 log B, where B is the 26-dB emission bandwidth in MHz. In addition, the
peak power spectral density shall not exceed 17 dBm in any 1–MHz band. If
transmitting antennas of directional gain greater than 6 dBi are used, both
the maximum conducted output power and the peak power spectral density shall
be reduced by the amount in dB that the directional gain of the antenna
exceeds 6 dBi. However, fixed point-to-point U-NII devices operating in this
band may employ transmitting antennas with directional gain up to 23 dBi
without any corresponding reduction in the transmitter peak output power or
peak power spectral density. For fixed, point-to-point U-NII transmitters
that employ a directional antenna gain greater than 23 dBi, a 1 dB reduction
in peak transmitter power and peak power spectral density for each 1 dB of
antenna gain in excess of 23 dBi would be required. Fixed, point-to-point
operations exclude the use of point-to-multipoint systems, omnidirectional
applications, and multiple collocated transmitters transmitting the same
information. The operator of the U-NII device, or if the equipment is
professionally installed, the installer, is responsible for ensuring that
systems employing high gain directional antennas are used exclusively for
fixed, point-to-point operations.

Note to paragraph(a)(3): The Commission strongly recommends that parties
employing U-NII devices to provide critical communications services should
determine if there are any nearby Government radar systems that could affect
their operation.

(4) The maximum conducted output power must be measured over any interval of
continuous transmission using instrumentation calibrated in terms of an
rms-equivalent voltage. The measurement results shall be properly adjusted
for any instrument limitations, such as detector response times, limited
resolution bandwidth capability when compared to the emission bandwidth,
sensitivity, etc., so as to obtain a true peak measurement conforming to the
above definitions for the emission in question.

(5) The peak power spectral density is measured as a conducted emission by
direct connection of a calibrated test instrument to the equipment under
test. If the device cannot be connected directly, alternative techniques
acceptable to the Commission may be used. Measurements are made over a
bandwidth of 1 MHz or the 26 dB emission bandwidth of the device, whichever
is less. A resolution bandwidth less than the measurement bandwidth can be
used, provided that the measured power is integrated to show total power
over the measurement bandwidth. If the resolution bandwidth is approximately
equal to the measurement bandwidth, and much less than the emission
bandwidth of the equipment under test, the measured results shall be
corrected to account for any difference between the resolution bandwidth of
the test instrument and its actual noise bandwidth.

(6) The ratio of the peak excursion of the modulation envelope (measured
using a peak hold function) to the maximum conducted output power (measured
as specified above) shall not exceed 13 dB across any 1 MHz bandwidth or the
emission bandwidth whichever is less.

(b) Undesirable emission limits: Except as shown in paragraph (b)(6) of this
section, the peak emissions outside of the frequency bands of operation
shall be attenuated in accordance with the following limits:

(1) For transmitters operating in the 5.15–5.25 GHz band: all emissions
outside of the 5.15–5.35 GHz band shall not exceed an EIRP of –27 dBm/MHz.

(2) For transmitters operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz band: all emissions
outside of the 5.15–5.35 GHz band shall not exceed an EIRP of –27 dBm/MHz.
Devices operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz band that generate emissions in the
5.15–5.25 GHz band must meet all applicable technical requirements for
operation in the 5.15–5.25 GHz band (including indoor use) or alternatively
meet an out-of-band emission EIRP limit of –27 dBm/MHz in the 5.15–5.25 GHz
band.

(3) For transmitters operating in the 5.47–5.725 GHz band: all emissions
outside of the 5.47–5.725 GHz band shall not exceed an EIRP of −27 dBm/MHz.

(4) For transmitters operating in the 5.725–5.825 GHz band: all emissions
within the frequency range from the band edge to 10 MHz above or below the
band edge shall not exceed an EIRP of –17 dBm/MHz; for frequencies 10 MHz or
greater above or below the band edge, emissions shall not exceed an EIRP of
–27 dBm/MHz.

(5) The emission measurements shall be performed using a minimum resolution
bandwidth of 1 MHz. A lower resolution bandwidth may be employed near the
band edge, when necessary, provided the measured energy is integrated to
show the total power over 1 MHz.

(6) Unwanted emissions below 1 GHz must comply with the general field
strength limits set forth in §15.209. Further, any U-NII devices using an AC
power line are required to comply also with the conducted limits set forth
in §15.207.

(7) The provisions of §15.205 apply to intentional radiators operating under
this section.

(8) When measuring the emission limits, the nominal carrier frequency shall
be adjusted as close to the upper and lower frequency block edges as the
design of the equipment permits.

(c) The device shall automatically discontinue transmission in case of
either absence of information to transmit or operational failure. These
provisions are not intended to preclude the transmission of control or
signalling information or the use of repetitive codes used by certain
digital technologies to complete frame or burst intervals. Applicants shall
include in their application for equipment authorization a description of
how this requirement is met.

(d) [Reserved]

(e) Within the 5.15–5.25 GHz band, U-NII devices will be restricted to
indoor operations to reduce any potential for harmful interference to
co-channel MSS operations.

(f) U-NII devices are subject to the radio frequency radiation exposure
requirements specified in §1.1307(b), §2.1091 and §2.1093 of this chapter,
as appropriate. All equipment shall be considered to operate in a “general
population/uncontrolled” environment. Applications for equipment
authorization of devices operating under this section must contain a
statement confirming compliance with these requirements for both fundamental
emissions and unwanted emissions. Technical information showing the basis
for this statement must be submitted to the Commission upon request.

(g) Manufacturers of U-NII devices are responsible for ensuring frequency
stability such that an emission is maintained within the band of operation
under all conditions of normal operation as specified in the users manual.

(h) Transmit Power Control (TPC) and Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS).

(1) Transmit power control (TPC). U-NII devices operating in the 5.25–5.35
GHz band and the 5.47–5.725 GHz band shall employ a TPC mechanism. The U-NII
device is required to have the capability to operate at least 6 dB below the
mean EIRP value of 30 dBm. A TPC mechanism is not required for systems with
an e.i.r.p. of less than 500 mW.

(2) Radar Detection Function of Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). U-NII
devices operating in the 5.25–5.35 GHz and 5.47–5.725 GHz bands shall employ
a DFS radar detection mechanism to detect the presence of radar systems and
to avoid co-channel operation with radar systems. The minimum DFS detection
threshold for devices with a maximum e.i.r.p. of 200 mW to 1 W is −64 dBm.
For devices that operate with less than 200 mW e.i.r.p. the minimum
detection threshold is −62 dBm. The detection threshold is the received
power averaged over 1 microsecond referenced to a 0 dBi antenna. The DFS
process shall be required to provide a uniform spreading of the loading over
all the available channels.

(i) Operational Modes. The DFS requirement applies to the following
operational modes:

(A) The requirement for channel availability check time applies in the
master operational mode.

(B) The requirement for channel move time applies in both the master and
slave operational modes.

(ii) Channel Availability Check Time. A U-NII device shall check if there is
a radar system already operating on the channel before it can initiate a
transmission on a channel and when it has to move to a new channel. The
U-NII device may start using the channel if no radar signal with a power
level greater than the interference threshold values listed in paragraph
(h)(2) of this part, is detected within 60 seconds.

(iii) Channel Move Time. After a radar's presence is detected, all
transmissions shall cease on the operating channel within 10 seconds.
Transmissions during this period shall consist of normal traffic for a
maximum of 200 ms after detection of the radar signal. In addition,
intermittent management and control signals can be sent during the remaining
time to facilitate vacating the operating channel.

(iv) Non-occupancy Period. A channel that has been flagged as containing a
radar system, either by a channel availability check or in-service
monitoring, is subject to a non-occupancy period of at least 30 minutes. The
non-occupancy period starts at the time when the radar system is detected.

[ 63 FR 40836 , July 31, 1998, as amended at 69 FR 2687 , Jan. 20, 2004; 69 FR 54036 , Sept. 7, 2004]

Subpart F—Ultra-Wideband Operation

top

Source: 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002, unless otherwise noted.

§ 15.501 Scope.

top

This subpart sets out the regulations for unlicensed ultra-wideband
transmission systems.

§ 15.503 Definitions.

top

(a) UWB bandwidth. For the purpose of this subpart, the UWB bandwidth is the
frequency band bounded by the points that are 10 dB below the highest
radiated emission, as based on the complete transmission system including
the antenna. The upper boundary is designated f[H]and the lower boundary is
designated f[L]. The frequency at which the highest radiated emission occurs
is designated f[M].

(b) Center frequency. The center frequency, f[C], equals (f[H]+ f[L])/2.

(d) Ultra-wideband (UWB) transmitter. An intentional radiator that, at any
point in time, has a fractional bandwidth equal to or greater than 0.20 or
has a UWB bandwidth equal to or greater than 500 MHz, regardless of the
fractional bandwidth.

(e) Imaging system. A general category consisting of ground penetrating
radar systems, medical imaging systems, wall imaging systems through-wall
imaging systems and surveillance systems. As used in this subpart, imaging
systems do not include systems designed to detect the location of tags or
systems used to transfer voice or data information.

(f) Ground penetrating radar (GPR) system. A field disturbance sensor that
is designed to operate only when in contact with, or within one meter of,
the ground for the purpose of detecting or obtaining the images of buried
objects or determining the physical properties within the ground. The energy
from the GPR is intentionally directed down into the ground for this
purpose.

(g) Medical imaging system. A field disturbance sensor that is designed to
detect the location or movement of objects within the body of a person or
animal.

(h) Wall imaging system. A field disturbance sensor that is designed to
detect the location of objects contained within a “wall” or to determine the
physical properties within the “wall.” The “wall” is a concrete structure,
the side of a bridge, the wall of a mine or another physical structure that
is dense enough and thick enough to absorb the majority of the signal
transmitted by the imaging system. This category of equipment does not
include products such as “stud locators” that are designed to locate objects
behind gypsum, plaster or similar walls that are not capable of absorbing
the transmitted signal.

(i) Through-wall imaging system. A field disturbance sensor that is designed
to detect the location or movement of persons or objects that are located on
the other side of an opaque structure such as a wall or a ceiling. This
category of equipment may include products such as “stud locators” that are
designed to locate objects behind gypsum, plaster or similar walls that are
not thick enough or dense enough to absorb the transmitted signal.

(j) Surveillance system. A field disturbance sensor used to establish a
stationary RF perimeter field that is used for security purposes to detect
the intrusion of persons or objects.

(k) EIRP. Equivalent isotropically radiated power, i.e., the product of the
power supplied to the antenna and the antenna gain in a given direction
relative to an isotropic antenna. The EIRP, in terms of dBm, can be
converted to a field strength, in dBuV/m at 3 meters, by adding 95.2. As
used in this subpart, EIRP refers to the highest signal strength measured in
any direction and at any frequency from the UWB device, as tested in
accordance with the procedures specified in §15.31(a) and 15.523 of this
chapter.

(l) Law enforcement, fire and emergency rescue organizations. As used in
this subpart, this refers to those parties eligible to obtain a license from
the FCC under the eligibility requirements specified in §90.20(a)(1) of this
chapter.

(m) Hand held. As used in this subpart, a hand held device is a portable
device, such as a lap top computer or a PDA, that is primarily hand held
while being operated and that does not employ a fixed infrastructure.

§ 15.505 Cross reference.

top

(a) Except where specifically stated otherwise within this subpart, the
provisions of subparts A and B and of §§15.201 through 15.204 and 15.207 of
subpart C of this part apply to unlicensed UWB intentional radiators. The
provisions of §15.35(c) and 15.205 do not apply to devices operated under
this subpart. The provisions of Footnote US 246 to the Table of Frequency
Allocations contained in §2.106 of this chapter does not apply to devices
operated under this subpart.

(b) The requirements of this subpart apply only to the radio transmitter,
i.e., the intentional radiator, contained in the UWB device. Other aspects
of the operation of a UWB device may be subject to requirements contained
elsewhere in this chapter. In particular, a UWB device that contains digital
circuitry not directly associated with the operation of the transmitter also
is subject to the requirements for unintentional radiators in subpart B of
this part. Similarly, an associated receiver that operates (tunes) within
the frequency range 30 MHz to 960 MHz is subject to the requirements in
subpart B of this part.

§ 15.507 Marketing of UWB equipment.

top

In some cases, the operation of UWB devices is limited to specific parties,
e.g., law enforcement, fire and rescue organizations operating under the
auspices of a state or local government. The marketing of UWB devices must
be directed solely to parties eligible to operate the equipment. The
responsible party, as defined in §2.909 of this chapter, is responsible for
ensuring that the equipment is marketed only to eligible parties. Marketing
of the equipment in any other manner may be considered grounds for
revocation of the grant of certification issued for the equipment.

§ 15.509 Technical requirements for ground penetrating radars and wall
imaging systems.

top

(a) The UWB bandwidth of an imaging system operating under the provisions of
this section must be below 10.6 GHz.

(b) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to GPRs and
wall imaging systems operated for purposes associated with law enforcement,
fire fighting, emergency rescue, scientific research, commercial mining, or
construction.

(1) Parties operating this equipment must be eligible for licensing under
the provisions of part 90 of this chapter.

(2) The operation of imaging systems under this section requires
coordination, as detailed in §15.525.

(c) A GPR that is designed to be operated while being hand held and a wall
imaging system shall contain a manually operated switch that causes the
transmitter to cease operation within 10 seconds of being released by the
operator. In lieu of a switch located on the imaging system, it is
permissible to operate an imaging system by remote control provided the
imaging system ceases transmission within 10 seconds of the remote switch
being released by the operator.

(d) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
§15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 –65.3
1610–1990 –53.3
1990–3100 –51.3
3100–10600 –41.3
Above 10600 –51.3

(e) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
paragraph (d) of this section, UWB transmitters operating under the
provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
1164–1240 –75.3
1559–1610 –75.3

(f) For UWB devices where the frequency at which the highest radiated
emission occurs, f[M], is above 960 MHz, there is a limit on the peak level
of the emissions contained within a 50 MHz bandwidth centered on f[M]. That
limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ a different resolution
bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak emission limit, following
the procedures described in §15.521.

[ 68 FR 19749 , Apr. 22, 2003]

§ 15.510 Technical requirements for through D-wall imaging systems.

top

(a) The UWB bandwidth of an imaging system operating under the provisions of
this section must be below 960 MHz or the center frequency, f[C], and the
frequency at which the highest radiated emission occurs, f[M], must be
contained between 1990 MHz and 10600 MHz.

(b) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to
through-wall imaging systems operated by law enforcement, emergency rescue
or firefighting organizations that are under the authority of a local or
state government.

(1) Parties operating this equipment must be eligible for licensing under
the provisions of part 90 of this chapter.

(2) The operation of these imaging systems requires coordination, as
detailed in §15.525.

(3) The imaging system shall contain a manually operated switch that causes
the transmitter to cease operation within 10 seconds of being released by
the operator. In lieu of a switch located on the imaging system, it is
permissible to operate an imaging system by remote control provided the
imaging system ceases transmission within 10 seconds of the remote switch
being released by the operator.

(4) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz shall not exceed the emission
levels in §15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz shall not exceed the
following average limits when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1
MHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −65.3
1610–1990 −53.3
Above 1990 −51.3

(5) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
paragraph (c)(4) of this section, emissions from these imaging systems shall
not exceed the following average limits when measured using a resolution
bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
1164–1240 −75.3
1559–1610 −75.3

(d) For equipment operating with f[C]and f[M]between 1990 MHz and 10600 MHz:

(1) Parties operating this equipment must hold a license issued by the
Federal Communications Commission to operate a transmitter in the Public
Safety Radio Pool under part 90 of this chapter. The license may be held by
the organization for which the UWB operator works on a paid or volunteer
basis.

(2) This equipment may be operated only for law enforcement applications,
the providing of emergency services, and necessary training operations.

(3) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz shall not exceed the emission
levels in §15.209 of this chapter. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz
shall not exceed the following average limits when measured using a
resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −46.3
1610–10600 −41.3
Above 10600 −51.3

(4) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the paragraph
(d)(3) of this section, emissions from these imaging systems shall not
exceed the following average limits when measured using a resolution
bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
1164–1240 −56.3
1559–1610 −56.3

(5) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

(e) Through-wall imaging systems operating under the provisions of this
section shall bear the following or similar statement in a conspicuous
location on the device: “Operation of this device is restricted to law
enforcement, emergency rescue and firefighter personnel. Operation by any
other party is a violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and could subject the operator
to serious legal penalties.”

[ 68 FR 19750 , Apr. 22, 2003]

§ 15.511 Technical requirements for surveillance systems.

top

(a) The UWB bandwidth of an imaging system operating under the provisions of
this section must be contained between 1990 MHz and 10,600 MHz.

(b) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to fixed
surveillance systems operated by law enforcement, fire or emergency rescue
organizations or by manufacturers licensees, petroleum licensees or power
licensees as defined in §90.7 of this chapter.

(1) Parties operating under the provisions of this section must be eligible
for licensing under the provisions of part 90 of this chapter.

(2) The operation of imaging systems under this section requires
coordination, as detailed in §15.525.

(c) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
§15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −53.3
1610–1990 −51.3
1990–10600 −41.3
Above 10600 −51.3

(d) In addition to the radiated emission limits specified in the table in
paragraph (c) of this section, UWB transmitters operating under the
provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of no less than 1 kHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
1164–1240 −63.3
1559–1610 −63.3

(e) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

(f) Imaging systems operating under the provisions of this section shall
bear the following or similar statement in a conspicuous location on the
device: “Operation of this device is restricted to law enforcement, fire and
rescue officials, public utilities, and industrial entities. Operation by
any other party is a violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and could subject the
operator to serious legal penalties.”

[ 68 FR 19750 , Apr. 22, 2003]

§ 15.513 Technical requirements for medical imaging systems.

top

(a) The UWB bandwidth of an imaging system operating under the provisions of
this section must be contained between 3100 MHz and 10,600 MHz.

(b) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to medical
imaging systems used at the direction of, or under the supervision of, a
licensed health care practitioner. The operation of imaging systems under
this section requires coordination, as detailed in §15.525.

(c) A medical imaging system shall contain a manually operated switch that
causes the transmitter to cease operation within 10 seconds of being
released by the operator. In lieu of a switch located on the imaging system,
it is permissible to operate an imaging system by remote control provided
the imaging system ceases transmission within 10 seconds of the remote
switch being released by the operator.

(d) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
§15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −65.3
1610–1990 −53.3
011990–3100 −51.3
3100–10600 −41.3
Above 10600 −51.3

(f) There is a limit on the peak level of the emissions contained within a
50 MHz bandwidth centered on the frequency at which the highest radiated
emission occurs, f[M]. That limit is 0 dBm EIRP. It is acceptable to employ
a different resolution bandwidth, and a correspondingly different peak
emission limit, following the procedures described in §15.521.

[ 68 FR 19751 , Apr. 22, 2003]

§ 15.515 Technical requirements for vehicular radar systems.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to UWB field
disturbance sensors mounted in terrestrial transportation vehicles. These
devices shall operate only when the vehicle is operating, e.g., the engine
is running. Operation shall occur only upon specific activation, such as
upon starting the vehicle, changing gears, or engaging a turn signal.

(b) The UWB bandwidth of a vehicular radar system operating under the
provisions of this section shall be contained between 22 GHz and 29 GHz. In
addition, the center frequency, f[C], and the frequency at which the highest
level emission occurs, f[M], must be greater than 24.075 GHz.

(c) Following proper installation, vehicular radar systems shall attenuate
any emissions within the 23.6–24.0 GHz band that appear 38 degrees or
greater above the horizontal plane by 25 dB below the limit specified in
paragraph (d) of this section. For equipment authorized, manufactured or
imported on or after January 1, 2005, this level of attenuation shall be 25
dB for any emissions within the 23.6–24.0 GHz band that appear 30 degrees or
greater above the horizontal plane. For equipment authorized, manufactured
or imported on or after January 1, 2010, this level of attenuation shall be
30 dB for any emissions within the 23.6–24.0 GHz band that appear 30 degrees
or greater above the horizontal plane. For equipment authorized,
manufactured or imported on or after January 1, 2014, this level of
attenuation shall be 35 dB for any emissions within the 23.6–24.0 GHz band
that appear 30 degrees or greater above the horizontal plane. This level of
attenuation can be achieved through the antenna directivity, through a
reduction in output power or any other means.

(d) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
§15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −75.3
1610–22,000 −61.3
22,000–29,000 −41.3
29,000–31,000 −51.3
Above 31,000 −61.3

(g) The emission levels from devices operating under the provisions of this
section that employ gated transmissions may be measured with the gating
active. Measurements made in this manner shall be repeated over multiple
sweeps with the analyzer set for maximum hold until the amplitude
stabilizes.

[ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002, as amended at 70 FR 6776 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.517 Technical requirements for indoor UWB systems.

top

(a) Operation under the provisions of this section is limited to UWB
transmitters employed solely for indoor operation.

(1) Indoor UWB devices, by the nature of their design, must be capable of
operation only indoors. The necessity to operate with a fixed indoor
infrastructure, e.g., a transmitter that must be connected to the AC power
lines, may be considered sufficient to demonstrate this.

(2) The emissions from equipment operated under this section shall not be
intentionally directed outside of the building in which the equipment is
located, such as through a window or a doorway, to perform an outside
function, such as the detection of persons about to enter a building.

(3) The use of outdoor mounted antennas, e.g., antennas mounted on the
outside of a building or on a telephone pole, or any other outdoors
infrastructure is prohibited.

(4) Field disturbance sensors installed inside of metal or underground
storage tanks are considered to operate indoors provided the emissions are
directed towards the ground.

(5) A communications system shall transmit only when the intentional
radiator is sending information to an associated receiver.

(b) The UWB bandwidth of a UWB system operating under the provisions of this
section must be contained between 3100 MHz and 10,600 MHz.

(c) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
§15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −75.3
1610–1990 −53.3
1990–3100 −51.3
3100–10600 −41.3
Above 10600 −51.3

(f) UWB systems operating under the provisions of this section shall bear
the following or similar statement in a conspicuous location on the device
or in the instruction manual supplied with the device:

“This equipment may only be operated indoors. Operation outdoors is in
violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and could subject the operator to serious legal
penalties.”

[ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002; 67 FR 39632 , June 10, 2002]

§ 15.519 Technical requirements for hand held UWB systems.

top

(a) UWB devices operating under the provisions of this section must be hand
held, i.e., they are relatively small devices that are primarily hand held
while being operated and do not employ a fixed infrastructure.

(1) A UWB device operating under the provisions of this section shall
transmit only when it is sending information to an associated receiver. The
UWB intentional radiator shall cease transmission within 10 seconds unless
it receives an acknowledgement from the associated receiver that its
transmission is being received. An acknowledgment of reception must continue
to be received by the UWB intentional radiator at least every 10 seconds or
the UWB device must cease transmitting.

(2) The use of antennas mounted on outdoor structures, e.g., antennas
mounted on the outside of a building or on a telephone pole, or any fixed
outdoors infrastructure is prohibited. Antennas may be mounted only on the
hand held UWB device.

(3) UWB devices operating under the provisions of this section may operate
indoors or outdoors.

(b) The UWB bandwidth of a device operating under the provisions of this
section must be contained between 3100 MHz and 10,600 MHz.

(c) The radiated emissions at or below 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the emission levels in
§15.209. The radiated emissions above 960 MHz from a device operating under
the provisions of this section shall not exceed the following average limits
when measured using a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz:
Frequency in MHz EIRP in dBm
960–1610 −75.3
1610–1990 −63.3
1990–3100 −61.3
3100–10600 −41.3
Above 10600 −61.3

[ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002; 67 FR 39632 , June 10, 2002]

§ 15.521 Technical requirements applicable to all UWB devices.

top

(a) UWB devices may not be employed for the operation of toys. Operation
onboard an aircraft, a ship or a satellite is prohibited.

(b) Manufacturers and users are reminded of the provisions of §§15.203 and
15.204.

(c) Emissions from digital circuitry used to enable the operation of the UWB
transmitter shall comply with the limits in §15.209, rather than the limits
specified in this subpart, provided it can be clearly demonstrated that
those emissions from the UWB device are due solely to emissions from digital
circuitry contained within the transmitter and that the emissions are not
intended to be radiated from the transmitter's antenna. Emissions from
associated digital devices, as defined in §15.3(k), e.g., emissions from
digital circuitry used to control additional functions or capabilities other
than the UWB transmission, are subject to the limits contained in Subpart B
of this part.

(d) Within the tables in §§15.509, 15.511, 15.513, 15.515, 15.517, and
15.519, the tighter emission limit applies at the band edges. Radiated
emission levels at and below 960 MHz are based on measurements employing a
CISPR quasi-peak detector. Radiated emission levels above 960 MHz are based
on RMS average measurements over a 1 MHz resolution bandwidth. The RMS
average measurement is based on the use of a spectrum analyzer with a
resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz, an RMS detector, and a 1 millisecond or less
averaging time. Unless otherwise stated, if pulse gating is employed where
the transmitter is quiescent for intervals that are long compared to the
nominal pulse repetition interval, measurements shall be made with the pulse
train gated on. Alternative measurement procedures may be considered by the
Commission.

(e) The frequency at which the highest radiated emission occurs, f[M], must
be contained within the UWB bandwidth.

(f) Imaging systems may be employed only for the type of information
exchange described in their specific definitions contained in §15.503. The
detection of tags or the transfer or data or voice information is not
permitted under the standards for imaging systems.

(g) When a peak measurement is required, it is acceptable to use a
resolution bandwidth other than the 50 MHz specified in this subpart. This
resolution bandwidth shall not be lower than 1 MHz or greater than 50 MHz,
and the measurement shall be centered on the frequency at which the highest
radiated emission occurs, f[M]. If a resolution bandwidth other than 50 MHz
is employed, the peak EIRP limit shall be 20 log (RBW/50) dBm where RBW is
the resolution bandwidth in megahertz that is employed. This may be
converted to a peak field strength level at 3 meters using E(dBuV/m) = P(dBm
EIRP) + 95.2. If RBW is greater than 3 MHz, the application for
certification filed with the Commission must contain a detailed description
of the test procedure, calibration of the test setup, and the
instrumentation employed in the testing.

(h) The highest frequency employed in §15.33 to determine the frequency
range over which radiated measurements are made shall be based on the center
frequency, f[C], unless a higher frequency is generated within the UWB
device. For measuring emission levels, the spectrum shall be investigated
from the lowest frequency generated in the UWB transmitter, without going
below 9 kHz, up to the frequency range shown in §15.33(a) or up to f[C]+
3/(pulse width in seconds), whichever is higher. There is no requirement to
measure emissions beyond 40 GHz provided f[C]is less than 10 GHz; beyond 100
GHz if f[C]is at or above 10 GHz and below 30 GHz; or beyond 200 GHz if
f[C]is at or above 30 GHz.

(i) The prohibition in §2.201(f) and 15.5(d) of this chapter against Class B
(damped wave) emissions does not apply to UWB devices operating under this
subpart.

(j) Responsible parties are reminded of the other standards and requirements
cross referenced in §15.505, such as a limit on emissions conducted onto the
AC power lines.

[ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 19751 , Apr. 22, 2003; 70 FR 6776 , Feb. 9, 2005]

§ 15.523 Measurement procedures.

top

Measurements shall be made in accordance with the procedures specified by
the Commission.

§ 15.525 Coordination requirements.

top

(a) UWB imaging systems require coordination through the FCC before the
equipment may be used. The operator shall comply with any constraints on
equipment usage resulting from this coordination.

(b) The users of UWB imaging devices shall supply operational areas to the
FCC Office of Engineering and Technology, which shall coordinate this
information with the Federal Government through the National
Telecommunications and Information Administration. The information provided
by the UWB operator shall include the name, address and other pertinent
contact information of the user, the desired geographical area(s) of
operation, and the FCC ID number and other nomenclature of the UWB device.
If the imaging device is intended to be used for mobile applications, the
geographical area(s) of operation may be the state(s) or county(ies) in
which the equipment will be operated. The operator of an imaging system used
for fixed operation shall supply a specific geographical location or the
address at which the equipment will be operated. This material shall be
submitted to Frequency Coordination Branch, OET, Federal Communications
Commission, 445 12th Street, SW, Washington, D.C. 20554, Attn: UWB
Coordination.

(c) The manufacturers, or their authorized sales agents, must inform
purchasers and users of their systems of the requirement to undertake
detailed coordination of operational areas with the FCC prior to the
equipment being operated.

(d) Users of authorized, coordinated UWB systems may transfer them to other
qualified users and to different locations upon coordination of change of
ownership or location to the FCC and coordination with existing authorized
operations.

(e) The FCC/NTIA coordination report shall identify those geographical areas
within which the operation of an imaging system requires additional
coordination or within which the operation of an imaging system is
prohibited. If additional coordination is required for operation within
specific geographical areas, a local coordination contact will be provided.
Except for operation within these designated areas, once the information
requested on the UWB imaging system is submitted to the FCC no additional
coordination with the FCC is required provided the reported areas of
operation do not change. If the area of operation changes, updated
information shall be submitted to the FCC following the procedure in
paragraph (b) of this section.

(f) The coordination of routine UWB operations shall not take longer than 15
business days from the receipt of the coordination request by NTIA. Special
temporary operations may be handled with an expedited turn-around time when
circumstances warrant. The operation of UWB systems in emergency situations
involving the safety of life or property may occur without coordination
provided a notification procedure, similar to that contained in §2.405(a)
through (e) of this chapter, is followed by the UWB equipment user.

[ 67 FR 34856 , May 16, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 19751 , Apr. 22, 2003]

Subpart G—Access Broadband Over Power Line (Access BPL)

top

Source: 70 FR 1374 , Jan. 7, 2005, unless otherwise noted.

§ 15.601 Scope.

top

This subpart sets out the regulations for Access Broadband over Power Line
(Access BPL) devices operating in the 1.705–80 MHz band over medium or low
voltage lines.

§ 15.603 Definitions.

top

(a) Excluded Band: A band of frequencies within which Access BPL operations
are not permitted.

(b) Exclusion Zone: A geographical area within which Access BPL operations
are not permitted in certain frequency bands.

(c) Consultation. The process of communication between an entity operating
Access BPL and a licensed public safety or other designated point of contact
for the purpose of avoiding potential harmful interference.

(d) Consultation area: A designated geographical area within which
consultation with public safety users or other designated point of contact
is required before an Access BPL may be operated at designated frequencies.

(e) Low Voltage power line. A power line carrying low voltage, e.g. ,
240/120 volts from a distribution transformer to a customer's premises.

(f) Medium Voltage power line. A power line carrying between 1,000 to 40,000
volts from a power substation to neighborhoods. Medium voltage lines may be
overhead or underground, depending on the power grid network topology.

(g) Access BPL Database. A database operated by an industry-sponsored
entity, recognized by the Federal Communications Commission and the National
Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA), containing
information regarding existing and planned Access BPL systems, as required
in §15.615(a) of this chapter.

§ 15.605 Cross reference.

top

(a) The provisions of subparts A and B of this part apply to Access BPL
devices, except where specifically noted. The provisions of subparts C
through F of this part do not apply to Access BPL devices except where
specifically noted.

(b) The requirements of this subpart apply only to the radio circuitry that
is used to provide carrier current operation for the Access BPL device.
Other aspects of the operation of an Access BPL device may be subject to
requirements contained elsewhere in this chapter. In particular, an Access
BPL device that includes digital circuitry that is not used solely to enable
the operation of the radio frequency circuitry used to provide carrier
current operation also is subject to the requirements for unintentional
radiators in subpart B of this part.

§ 15.607 Equipment authorization of Access BPL equipment.

top

Access BPL equipment shall be subject to Certification as specified in
§15.101.

§ 15.609 Marketing of Access BPL equipment.

top

The marketing of Access BPL equipment must be directed solely to parties
eligible to operate the equipment. Eligible parties consist of AC power line
public utilities, Access BPL service providers and associates of Access BPL
service providers. The responsible party, as defined in §2.909 of this
chapter, is responsible for ensuring that the equipment is marketed only to
eligible parties. Marketing of the equipment in any other manner may be
considered grounds for revocation of the grant of certification issued for
the equipment.

§ 15.611 General technical requirements.

top

(a) Conducted emission limits. Access BPL is not subject to the conducted
emission limits of §15.107.

(b) Radiated emission limits —(1) Medium voltage power lines. (i) Access BPL
systems that operate in the frequency range of 1.705 kHz to 30 MHz over
medium voltage power lines shall comply with the radiated emission limits
for intentional radiators provided in §15.209.

(ii) Access BPL systems that operate in the frequency range above 30 MHz
over medium voltage power lines shall comply with the radiated emission
limits provided in §15.109(b).

(2) Low voltage power lines. Access BPL systems that operate over
low-voltage power lines, including those that operate over low-voltage lines
that are connected to the in-building wiring, shall comply with the radiated
emission limits provided in §15.109(a) and (e).

(c) Interference Mitigation and Avoidance. (1) Access BPL systems shall
incorporate adaptive interference mitigation techniques to remotely reduce
power and adjust operating frequencies, in order to avoid site-specific,
local use of the same spectrum by licensed services. These techniques may
include adaptive or “notch” filtering, or complete avoidance of frequencies,
or bands of frequencies, locally used by licensed radio operations.

(i) For frequencies below 30 MHz, when a notch filter is used to avoid
interference to a specific frequency band, the Access BPL system shall be
capable of attenuating emissions within that band to a level at least 20 dB
below the applicable part 15 limits.

(ii) For frequencies above 30 MHz, when a notch filter is used to avoid
interference to a specific frequency band, the Access BPL system shall be
capable of attenuating emissions within that band to a level at least 10 dB
below the applicable part 15 limits.

(iii) At locations where an Access BPL operator attenuates radiated
emissions from its operations in accordance with the above required
capabilities, we will not require that operator to take further actions to
resolve complaints of harmful interference to mobile operations.

(2) Access BPL systems shall comply with applicable radiated emission limits
upon power-up following a fault condition, or during a start-up operation
after a shut-off procedure, by the use of a non-volatile memory, or some
other method, to immediately restore previous settings with programmed
notches and excluded bands, to avoid time delay caused by the need for
manual re-programming during which protected services may be vulnerable.

(3) Access BPL systems shall incorporate a remote-controllable shut-down
feature to deactivate, from a central location, any unit found to cause
harmful interference, if other interference mitigation techniques do not
resolve the interference problem.

[ 70 FR 1374 , Jan. 7, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 49379 , Aug. 23, 2006]

§ 15.613 Measurement procedures.

top

Compliance measurements for Access BPL shall be made in accordance with the
Guidelines for Access BPL systems specified by the Commission.

§ 15.615 General administrative requirements.

top

(a) Access BPL Database. Entities operating Access BPL systems shall supply
to an industry-recognized entity, information on all existing Access BPL
systems and all proposed Access BPL systems for inclusion into a publicly
available data base, within 30 days prior to initiation of service. Such
information shall include the following:

(1) The name of the Access BPL provider.

(2) The frequencies of the Access BPL operation.

(3) The postal zip codes served by the specific Access BPL operation.

(4) The manufacturer and type of Access BPL equipment and its associated FCC
ID number, or, in the case of Access BPL equipment that has been subject to
verification, the Trade Name and Model Number, as specified on the equipment
label.

(5) The contact information, including both phone number and e-mail address
of a person at, or associated with, the BPL operator's company, to
facilitate the resolution of any interference complaint.

(6) The proposed/or actual date of Access BPL operation.

(b) The Access BPL database manager shall enter this information into the
publicly accessible database within three (3) business days of receipt.

(d) A licensed spectrum user experiencing harmful interference that is
suspected to be caused by an Access BPL system shall inform the local BPL
operator's contact person designated in the Access BPL database. The
investigation of the reported interference and the resolution of confirmed
harmful interference from the Access BPL system shall be successfully
completed by the BPL operator within a reasonable time period according to a
mutually acceptable schedule, after the receipt of an interference
complaint, in order to avoid protracted disruptions to licensed services.
The Access BPL operator shall respond to complaints of harmful interference
from public safety users within 24 hours. With regard to public safety
complaints, the BPL provider shall be required to immediately cease the
operations causing such complaint if it fails to respond within 24 hours.

(e) Consultation with public safety users. An entity operating an Access BPL
system shall notify and consult with the public safety users in the area
where it plans to deploy Access BPL, at least 30 days prior to initiation of
any operation or service. This entity shall design or implement the Access
BPL system such that it does not cause harmful interference in those
frequencies or bands used by the public safety agencies in the area served
by the Access BPL system. The notification shall include, at a minimum, the
information in paragraph (a) of this section.

(f) Federal government spectrum users and other radio service users. An
entity operating an Access BPL system shall ensure that, within its Access
BPL deployment area, its system does not operate on any frequencies
designated as excluded bands or on identified frequencies within any
designated exclusion zones.

(1) Excluded Bands. To protect Aeronautical (land) stations and aircraft
receivers, Access BPL operations using overhead medium voltage power lines
are prohibited in the frequency bands listed in Table 1. Specifically, such
BPL systems shall not place carrier frequencies in these bands.

Table 1—Excluded Frequency Bands
Frequency band
2,850–3,025 kHz
3,400–3,500 kHz
4,650–4,700 kHz
5,450–5,680 kHz
6,525–6,685 kHz
8,815–8,965 kHz
10,005–10,100 kHz
11,275–11,400 kHz
13,260–13,360 kHz
17,900–17,970 kHz
21,924–22,000 kHz
74.8–75.2 MHz

(2) Exclusion zones . Exclusion zones encompass the operation of any Access
BPL system within 1km of the boundary of coast station facilities at the
coordinates listed in Tables 2 and 2.1. Exclusion zones also encompass the
operation of Access BPL systems using overhead medium voltage power lines
within 65 km of the Very Large Array observatory located at the coordinate
34°04'43.50"; N, 107°37'03.82" W. Exclusion zones further encompass the
operation of Access BPL systems using overhead low voltage power lines or
underground power lines within 47 km of the Very Large Array observatory
located at the coordinate 34°04'43.50"; N, 107°37' 03.82" W. Within the
exclusion zones for coast stations, Access BPL systems shall not use carrier
frequencies within the band of 2173.5–2190.5 kHz. Within the exclusion zone
for the Very Large Array radio astronomy observatory, Access BPL systems
shall not use carrier frequencies within the 73.0–74.6 MHz band.

(i) Existing coast station facilities. Access BPL systems shall not operate
in the frequency band 2,173.5–2,190.5 kHz, within 1 kilometer (km) of the
boundary of coast station facilities at the coordinates listed in Tables 2
and 2.1. BPL operators planning to deploy Access BPL devices at these
frequencies in areas within these exclusion zones as defined above shall
consult with the appropriate point of contact for these coast stations to
ensure harmful interference is prevented at these facilities.

Point of contact: Commandant (CG 622), U.S. Coast Guard, 2100 2nd Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20593–0001, Telephone: (202) 267–2860, e-mail:
cgcomms@comdt.uscg.mil.

Table 2—Exclusion Zones for U.S. Coast Guard Coast Stations
Locale Latitude Longitude
Group Guam 13°35'23" N 144°50'24" E
GANTSEC 18°18'00" N 65°46'59" W
Puerto Rico 18°28'11" N 66°07'47" W
Honolulu 21°18'21" N 157°53'23" W
Group Key West 24°33'35" N 81°47'59" W
Trumbo Point CG Base 24°33'58" N 81°47'57" W
Miami 25°37'28" N 80°23'07" W
Everglades Park 25°50'10" N 81°23'13" W
Group Saint Petersburg (Everglades) 25°51'00" N 81°23'24" W
Station Ft. Lauderdale 26°05'21" N 80°06'40" W
Station Ft. Myers Beach 26°27'34" N 81°57'15" W
Group Miami (Ft. Pierce) 27°27'36" N 80°18'36" W
Station Ft. Pierce 27°27'50" N 80°18'27" W
Group Corpus Christi 27°42'01" N 97°16'11" W
Group Corpus Christi 27°42'06" N 97°16'45" W
ESD Saint Petersburg 27°45'21" N 82°37'32" W
Group Saint Petersburg 27°46'11" N 82°37'47" W
Station Port O'Connor 28°26'03" N 96°25'39" W
S. Padre Island 28°26'22" N 97°09'56" W
Freeport 28°55'59" N 95°16'59" W
Group Galveston (Freeport) 28°56'24" N 95°17'59" W
Station YANKEETOWN 29°01'51" N 82°43'39" W
Station Ponce De Leon Inlet 29°03'50" N 81°55'01" W
Group New Orleans (Grand Isle) 29°15'53" N 89°57'26" W
Galveston 29°19'59" N 94°46'18" W
Kapalan 29°20'04" N 94°47'17" W
Sabine 29°43'42" N 93°52'14" W
New Orleans 30°01'17" N 90°07'24" W
Panama City 30°10'01" N 85°45'04" W
Group Mobile (Panama City) 30°10'12" N 85°45'36" W
ANT Jacksonville Beach 30°17'16" N 81°24'10" W
Pensacola 30°20'24" N 87°18'17" W
Group Mayport 30°23'10" N 81°26'01" W
Group Mayport 30°23'24" N 81°25'48" W
Ft. Morgan 30°39'07" N 88°03'12" W
Tybee Lighthouse 32°01'15" N 80°50'39" W
Point Loma Lighthouse 32°39'56" N 117°14'34" W
Point Loma 32°40'07" N 117°14'14" W
Activities San Diego 32°43'59" N 117°11'13" W
Group Charleston (Sullivan's Island) 32°45'00" N 79°49'47" W
Sullivan's Island Lights 32°45'02" N 79°50'03" W
Group Charleston 32°46'25" N 79°56'37" W
Group San Diego 32°52'48" N 118°26'23" W
San Pedro 33°45'00" N 118°15'58" W
Group Fort Macon 33°53'24" N 78°01'48" W
Point Mugu 33°59'32" N 119°07'18" W
Group LA/Long Beach 34°07'11" N 119°06'35" W
Channel Island 34°09'17" N 119°13'11" W
Station Oxnard Channel Island 34°09'43" N 119°13'19" W
Group Ft. Macon 34°41'48" N 76°40'59" W
Group Cape Hatteras 35°13'59" N 75°31'59" W
Group Cape Hatteras 35°15'35" N 75°31'48" W
Morro Bay (Cambria) 35°31'21" N 121°03'31" W
San Clemente Island 32°50'24" N 118°23'15" W
Point Pinos 36°38'12" N 121°56'06" W
CAMSLANT 36°43'47" N 76°01'11" W
Group Hampton Roads 36°53'01" N 76°21'10" W
Point Montara 37°31'23" N 122°30'47" W
Point Montara Lighthouse 37°32'09" N 122°31'08" W
Group San Francisco 37°32'23" N 122°31'11" W
Group San Francisco 37°48'34" N 122°21'55" W
Point Bonita 37°49'00" N 122°31'41" W
Group Eastern Shores 37°55'47" N 75°22'47" W
Group Eastern Shore 37°55'50" N 75°22'58" W
CAMSPAC 38°06'00" N 122°55'48" W
Point Arena Lighthouse 38°57'18" N 124°44'28" W
Point Arena 38°57'36" N 123°44'23" W
Group Atlantic City 39°20'59" N 74°27'42" W
Activities New York 40°36'06" N 74°03'36" W
Activities New York 40°37'11" N 74°04'11" W
ESD Moriches Hut 40°47'19" N 72°44'53" W
Group Moriches 40°47'23" N 72°45'00" W
Group Humboldt Bay 40°58'41" N 124°06'31" W
Group Humboldt Bay 40°58'47" N 124°06'35" W
Trinidad Head 41°03'15" N 124°09'02" W
Group Long Island Sound 41°16'12" N 72°54'00" W
Station New Haven 41°16'12" N 72°54'06" W
Station Brant Point 41°17'21" N 70°05'31" W
Group Woods Hole 41°17'23" N 70°04'47" W
Station Castle Hill 41°27'46" N 71°21'42" W
Group Woods Hole 41°17'29" N 70°401'07" W
Boston Area 41°40'12" N 70°31'48" W
Station Provincetown 42°01'48" N 70°12'42" W
Eastern Point 42°36'24" N 70°39'26" W
Cape Blanco 42°50'16" N 124°33'52" W
Group North Bend 43°24'16" N 124°13'22" W
Group North Bend 43°24'35" N 124°14'23" W
Cape Elizabeth 43°33'28" N 70°12'00" W
Group South Portland 43°38'24" N 70°15'00" W
Group South Portland 43°38'45" N 70°14'51" W
Group SW Harbor 44°16'19" N 68°18'27" W
Group Southwest Harbor 44°16'48" N 68°18'36" W
Fort Stevens, Oregon 46°09'14" N 123°53'07" W
Group Astoria 46°09'29" N 123°31'48" W
Group Astoria 46°09'35" N 123°53'24" W
La Push 47°49'00" N 124°37'59" W
Station Quillayute River 47°54'49" N 124°38'01" W
Port Angeles 48°07'59" N 123°25'59" W
Group Port Angeles 48°08'24" N 123°24'35" W
Juneau (Sitka) 57°05'24" N 135°15'35" W
Kodiak 57°40'47" N 152°28'47" W
Valdez (Cape Hinchinbrook) 60°26'23" N 146°25'48" W

Note:Systems of coordinates comply with NAD 83.

Table 2.1—Exclusion Zones for Maritime Public Coast Stations

[Points of Contact Are Identified in the Commission's License Database]
Licensee name Location Latitude Longitude
Shipcom LLC Marina Del Ray, CA 33°56'21" N 118°27'14" W
Globe Wireless Rio Vista, CA 38°11'55" N 121°48'34" W
Avalon Communications Corp St. Thomas, VI 18°21'19" N 64°56'48" W
Globe Wireless Bishopville, MD 38°24'10" N 75°12'59" W
Shipcom LLC Mobile, AL 30°40'07" N 88°10'23" W
Shipcom LLC Coden, AL 30°22'35" N 88°12'20" W
Globe Wireless Pearl River, LA 30°22'13" N 89°47'26" W
Globe Wireless Kahalelani, HI 21°10'33" N 157°10'39" W
Globe Wireless Palo Alto, CA 37°26'44" N 122°06'48" W
Globe Wireless Agana, GU 13°29'22" N 144°49'39" E

Note: Systems of coordinates comply with NAD 83.

(ii) New or relocated Coast stations. In the unlikely event that a new or
relocated coast station is established for the 2.173.5–2.190.5 kHz band at a
coordinate not specified in Table 2 or 2.1, Access BPL operations in that
frequency band shall also be excluded within 1 km of the new coast station
facility;

(3) Consultation areas . Access BPL operators shall provide notification to
the appropriate point of contact specified regarding Access BPL operations
at any frequencies of potential concern in the following consultation areas,
at least 30 days prior to initiation of any operation or service. The
notification shall include, at a minimum, the information in paragraph (a)
of this section. We expect parties to consult in good faith to ensure that
no harmful interference is caused to licensed operations and that any
constraints on BPL deployments are minimized to those necessary to avoid
harmful interference. In the unlikely event that a new or relocated
aeronautical receive station is established for the 1.7–30 MHz band at a
coordinate not specified in Table 3b, Access BPL operators are also required
to coordinate with the appropriate point of contact regarding Access BPL
operations at any frequencies of potential concern in the new or relocated
consultation areas, and to adjust their system operating parameters to
protect the new or relocated aeronautical receive station.

(i) For frequencies in the 1.7–30 MHz frequency range, the areas within 4 km
of facilities located at the following coordinates:

(A) The Commission's protected field offices listed in 47 CFR 0.121, the
point-of-contact for which is specified in that section;

(B) The aeronautical stations listed in Tables 3a and 3b;

(ii) For frequencies in the 1.7–80.0 MHz frequency range, the areas within 4
km of facilities located at the coordinates specified for radio astronomy
facilities in 47 CFR 2.106, Note U.S. 311.

Point of contact: Electromagnetic Spectrum Manager, National Science
Foundation, Division of Astronomical Sciences, 4201 Wilson Blvd., Suite
1045, Arlington, VA 22230, (703) 292–4896, esm@nsf.gov .

(iii) For frequencies in the 1.7–80 MHz frequency range, the area within 1
km of the Table Mountain Radio Receiving Zone, the coordinates and point of
contact for which are specified in 47 CFR 21.113(b).

(iv) For frequencies in the 1.7–30 MHz frequency range, the areas within 37
km of radar receiver facilities located at the coordinates specified in
Table 6.

Point of contact: U.S. Coast Guard HQ, Division of Spectrum Management
CG–622, 2100 Second St., SW., Rm. 6611, Washington, DC 20593, Tel: (202)
267–6036, Fax: (202) 267–4106, e-mail: jtaboada@comdt.uscg.mil.

Table 3a—Consultation Area Coordinates for Aeronautical (OR) Stations
(1.7–30 MHz)
Command name Location Latitude Longitude
Washington Arlington, VA 38°51'07" N 77°02'15" W
Cape Cod Cape Cod, MA 41°42'00" N 70°30'00" W
Atlantic City Atlantic City, NJ 39°20'59" N 74°27'42" W
Elizabeth City Elizabeth City, NC 36°15'53" N 76°10'32" W
Savannah Savannah, GA 32°01'30" N 81°08'30" W
Miami Opa Locka, FL 25°54'22" N 80°16'01" W
Clearwater Clearwater, FL 27°54'27" N 82°41' 29" W
Borinquen Aguadilla, PR 18°18'36" N 67°04' 48" W
New Orleans New Orleans, LA 29°49'31" N 90°02' 06" W
Traverse City Traverse City, MI 44°44'24" N 85°34'54" W
San Diego San Diego, CA 32°43'33" N 117°10' 15" W
Sacramento McCllelan AFB, CA 38°40'06" N 121°24'04" W
Astoria Warrenton, OR 46°25'18" N 123°47' 46" W
North Bend North Bend, OR 43°24'39" N 124°14'35" W
Barbers Point Kapolei, HI 21°18'01" N 158°04'15" W
Kodiak Kodiak, AK 57°44'19" N 152°30'18" W
Houston Houston, TX 29°45'00" N 95°22'00" W
Detroit Mt. Clemens, MI 42°36'05" N 82°50'12" W
San Francisco San Francisco, CA 37°37'58" N 122°23'20" W
Los Angeles Los Angeles, CA 33°56'36" N 118°23'48" W
Humboldt Bay McKinleyville, CA 40°58'39" N 124°06'45" W
Port Angeles Port Angeles, WA 48°08'25" N 123°24'48" W
Sitka Sitka, AK 57°05'50" N 135°21'58" W

Note: Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

Point of contact: ARINC, 2551 Riva Road, Annapolis, MD 21401, Tel:
1–800–633–6882, Fax: (410) 266–2329, e-mail: arincmkt@arinc.com,
http://www.arinc.com.

Point of contact: ARINC, 2551 Riva Road, Annapolis, MD 21401, Tel:
1–800–633–6882, Fax: 410–266–2329, e-mail: bplnotifications@arinc.com ,
&fnl; http://www.arinc.com .

Table 3b—Consultation Area Coordinates for Aeronautical Receive Stations
(1.7–30 MHz)
Locale Latitude Longitude
Southampton, NY 40°55′15″ N 72°23′41″ W
Molokai, HI 21°12′23″ N 157°12′30″ W
Oahu, HI 21°22′27″ N 158°05′56″ W
Half Moon Bay, CA 37°39′64″ N 122°24′44″ W
Pt. Reyes, CA 38°06′00″ N 122°56′00″ W
Barrow, AK 71°17′24″ N 156°40′12″; W
Guam 13°28′12″ N 144°48′0.0″ E (note: Eastern Hemisphere)
NY Comm Center, NY 40°46′48″ N 73°05′46″ W
Cedar Rapids, IA 42°02′05.0″ N 91°38′37.6″ W
Beaumont, CA 33°54′27.1″ N 116°59′49.1″ W
Fairfield, TX 31°47′02.6″ N 96°47′03.0″ W
Houston, TX 29°36′35.8″ N 95°16′54.8″ W
Miami, FL 25°49′05″ N 80°18′28″ W

Note:Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

Table 4—Consultation Area Coordinates for Land Stations, Set 1 (1.7–30 MHz)
Command name Location Latitude Longitude
COMMSTA Boston Maspee, MA 41°24'00" N 70°18'57" W
Camslant Chesapeake, VA 36°33'59" N 76°15'23" W
COMMSTA Miami Miami, FL 25°36'58" N 80°23'04" W
COMMSTA New Orleans Belle Chasse, IA 29°52'40" N 89°54'46" W
Camspac Pt. Reyes Sta, CA 38°06'00" N 122°55'48" W
COMMSTA Honolulu Wahiawa, HI 21°31'08" N 157°59'28" W
COMMSTA Kodiak Kodiak, AK 57°04'26' N 152°28'20" W
Guam Finegayan, GU 13°53'08" N 144°50'20" E

Note: Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

Point of contact: COTHEN Technical Support Center, COTHEN Program Manager,
Tel: (800) 829–6336.

Table 5—Consultation Area Coordinates for Land Stations, Set 2 (1.7–30 MHz)
Site name Latitude Longitude
Albuquerque, NM 35°05'02" N 105°34'23" W
Arecibo, PR 18°17'26" N 66°22'33" W
Atlanta, GA 32°33"06 N 84°23'35" W
Beaufort, SC 34°34'22" N 76°09'48" W
Cape Charles, VA 37°05'37" N 75°58'06" W
Cedar Rapids, IA 42°00'09" N 91°17'39" W
Denver, CO 39°15'45" N 103°34'23" W
Fort Myers, FL 81°31'20" N 26°20'01" W
Kansas City, MO 38°22'10" N 93°21'48" W
Las Vegas, NV 36°21'15" N 114°17'33" W
Lovelock, NV 40°03'07" N 118°18'56" W
Memphis, TN 34°21'57" N 90°02'43" W
Miami, FL 25°46'20" N 80°28'48" W
Morehead City, NC 34°34'50" N 78°13'59" W
Oklahoma City, OK 34°30'52" N 97°30'52" W
Orlando, FL 28°31'30" N 80°48'58" W
Reno, NV 38°31'12" N 119°14'37" W
Sarasota, FL 27°12'41" N 81°31'20" W
Wilmington, NC 34°29'24" N 78°04'31" W

Note: Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

Point Of Contact: ROTHR Deputy Program Manager, (540) 653–3624.

Table 6—Consultation Area Coordinates for Radar Receiver Stations (1.7–30
MHz)
Latitude/Longitude
18°01' N/66°30' W
28°05' N/98°43' W
36°34' N/76°18' W

Note: Systems of coordinates conform to NAD 83.

[ 70 FR 1374 , Jan. 7, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 49379 , Aug. 23, 2006]
Browse Previous | Browse Next
_________________________________________________

For questions or comments regarding e-CFR editorial content, features, or
design, email ecfr@nara.gov.
For questions concerning e-CFR programming and delivery issues, email
webteam@gpo.gov.
Section 508 / Accessibility
August 1, 2007 -->

Goto Section: 47cfr80.pdf.13 | 47cfr80.pdf.17

Goto Year: 2006 | 2008 CiteFind - See documents on FCC website that cite this rule

Want to support this service? Thanks!

Report errors in this rule. Since these rules are converted to HTML by machine, it's possible errors have been made. Please help us improve these rules by clicking the Report FCC Rule Errors link to report an error.

hallikainen.com
Helping make public information public